Nissan Maxima 2016 Owner Manual

®

2016

MA X I MA

OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. You will also receive a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.

Additionally, you may receive a separate

Navigation Manual (if so equipped) that will explain the various features and functions your system may have.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed by NISSAN or by a NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by

NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any updates can also be found in the

Owner section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s

Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.”

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

© 2015 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side)

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

– Date of purchase

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: [email protected]

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: [email protected]

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

7

8

9

10

2

3

4

0

1

5

6

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2

Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3

Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4

Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

LII2293

1.

Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-21)

2.

Rear head restraints/headrests (P. 1-6)

3.

Rear seat belts (P. 1-11)

4.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-40)

5.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags (P. 1-40)

6.

Front head restraints/headrests (P. 1-6)

7.

Front seat belt with pretensioner and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-11, 1-40)

8.

Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-40)

9.

Door pressure sensor (passenger side shown, driver’s side similar) (P. 1-40)

10. Seats (P. 1-2)

11. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P.1-40)

12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-21)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

0-2


EXTERIOR FRONT

1.

Engine hood (P. 3-20)

2.

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)

3.

Windshield (P. 8-20)

4.

Power windows (P. 2-51)

5.

Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key®, keys (P. 3-3, 3-6, 3-2)

6.

Mirrors, side view camera

(if so equipped) (P. 3-28, 4-9)

7.

Tire pressure (P. 8-31)

8.

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

9.

Tire chains (P. 8-31)

10. Headlight and turn signal switch, replacing bulbs (P. 2-38, 8-27)

11. Fog light switch (P. 2-38)

12. Sonar sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-84)

13. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-9)


LII2287


0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4


LII2282

1.

Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-38)

2.

High-mounted stop light (P. 8-27)

3.

Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-21)

4.

Trunk lid (P. 3-21)

5.

Exterior trunk lid release/request button

(P. 3-6)

6.

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

7.

Fuel-filler door, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-23, 9-2)

8.

Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-3)


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1.

Interior trunk access (P. 1-2)

2.

Power moonroof (if so equipped)

(P. 2-55)

3.

Sun visors (P. 3-27)

4.

Map lights (P. 2-58)

5.

Rearview mirror (P. 3-28)

6.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

(P. 2-60)

7.

Glove box (P. 2-47)

8.

Cup holders (P. 2-47)

9.

Console box (P. 2-47)

10. Front seats (P. 1-2)

11. Rear seats (P. 1-2)


LII2288


0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6


LIC3260

1.

Vent (P. 4-24)

2.

Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-38)

3.

Supplemental front-impact air bag/horn

(P. 1-40, 2-42)

4.

Meters, gauges, warning lights, indicator lights and vehicle information display (P. 2-3, P. 2-7, P. 2-15)

5.


6.

Vent (P. 4-24)

7.

Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

8.

Navigation controls*

9.

Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 2-34)

10.

Vent (P. 4-24)

11.

Glove box (P. 2-47)

12.

Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-40)

13.

USB-AUX port (P. 2-46)

14.

Heater and air conditioning controls

(P. 4-25)

15.

Shift lever (P. 5-22)

16.

Display Commander*

17.

Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)

18.

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System/Audio control switches

(P. 4-29)

19.

Cruise control main/Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) (if so equipped) set switches (P. 5-40, 5-42)

20.

Hood release (P. 3-20)

21.

Fuse box (P. 8-22)

22.

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-45)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-45)

Trunk release switch (P. 3-21)

Rear power sunshade switch


23.

Instrument brightness control

(P. 2-38)/Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-3)

* Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.



0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8


LDI2749

VQ35DE engine

1.

Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

2.

Drive belt location (P. 8-18)

3.

Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)

4.

Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)

5.

Air cleaner (P. 8-20)

6.

Fuse block (P. 8-22)

7.

Fuse block/Fusible links (P. 8-22)

8.

Fusible links (P. 8-22)

9.

Battery (P. 8-16)

10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-10)

11. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

12. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)

13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-15)


WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warning light

Brake warning light

2-7

2-8 or

Charge warning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Forward emergency braking system warning light (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light

2-8

2-8

2-9

2-9

Warning light

Name Page

Master warning light 2-10

Indicator light

Power steering warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime

Supplemental air bag warning light

Name

Front fog light indicator light


High beam indicator light (blue)

2-11

2-11

2-11

Page

2-12

2-12

2-12

Indicator light

Name Page

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Security indicator light

Side light and headlight indicator light

(green)

Slip indicator light

2-12

2-13

2-13

2-13

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

2-13

2-14


0-9

MEMO

0-10


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Front power seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Center armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

SEATS

WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

ARS1152

● For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

1-2


● To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

● The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

LRS2692

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.


1-3

LRS2693

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

LRS2669

Lumbar support (if so equipped for driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Push the front or back end of the switch to adjust the seat lumbar area.

LRS2666

Thigh extension (if so equipped for driver’s seat)

Pull up and hold the lever to extend the front portion to the desired position.

1-4


LRS2691

FOLDING REAR SEAT

Interior trunk access

The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

1. Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position.

2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel shelf.

3. Push down on the button parcel shelf.

on the rear

4. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback

䊊

.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.


1-5

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

LRS2168

To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, open the trunk and pull on the strap

䊊

.

The rear seats can be locked using the mechanical key to prevent unauthorized access. For additional information on keys, refer to “Keys” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

LRS2694

CENTER ARMREST

Pull the armrest down until it rests on the seat cushion.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

1-6


LRS2695

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/headrests.

䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.

䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

● Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

● Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position.

● The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.

● Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

● If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2300

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks


1-7

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

LRS2299

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2302

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

1-8


5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2303

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)

䊊 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

WRS0134

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

LRS2351

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.


1-9

LRS2305

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.


LRS2306

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.


1-10


SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.


1-11

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

1-12


SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0014

WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted.

Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is placed in the ON position with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

● Once seat belt pretensioners have acti-

vated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor.

See a NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-

sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision by a

NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any collision.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.


1-13

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

LRS0786

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the driver and passenger seat belt.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning light will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

1-14


● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

● Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Front seat shown

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

LRS2692

LRS2674

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle

䊊 until you hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.


1-15

LRS2675

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips

䊊 as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack

䊊

. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle

䊊

. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly

1-16


To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

LRS0242

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the adjustment button

䊊 and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position

䊊

, so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.


1-17

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat belts.

Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool

(such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

1-18


There are three basic types of child restraint systems:

● Rear-facing child restraints

● Forward-facing child restraints

● Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones.

In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury.

Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, refer to

“Child restraints” in this section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rearfacing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.


1-19

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

● Are the child’s back and hips against the vehicle seatback?

● Is the child able to sit without slouching?

● Do the child’s knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?

● Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

● Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?

● Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

LRS2690

If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

1-20


WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area.

The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

ARS1098

WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

– The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

WRS0256

– Infants and children should never be held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.


1-21

– NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, refer to

“Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

– Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.

● When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

1-22


● If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

● If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).

● If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.

● Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

LRS2676

LATCH system lower anchor locations

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with the LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the

LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.


1-23

– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

WRS0700

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

1-24


LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

LRS0243

Top tether anchor point locations

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint, consult a

NISSAN dealer for details.

Anchor points shelf.

are located on the rear parcel

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.


1-25

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

1-26


LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

LRS0674


4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.



1-27


65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

WRS0256


1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0761


2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

1-28


LRS2395


3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS2396


4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0762


5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.


1-29

LRS2397


6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH



65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:


1-30


WRS0799

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

WRS0800

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.


1-31

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

WRS0697


6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-32


LRS2671

Rear seats

䊊

䊊

Top tether strap

Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard positions only).

Rear bench seat

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to


2. Position the top tether strap seatback.

over the

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point

䊊 on the rear-parcel shelf behind the child restraint.


If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, consult a NISSAN dealer for details.

WARNING



FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

WRS0699

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1



65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.


1-33

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.


The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to restraints/headrests” in this section.

“Head

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

WRS0680


3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

1-34


LRS0667


4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0668


5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0681


6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.



1-35

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 8.

WRS0698


8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-36


LRS0865


10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, refer to

⬙Front passenger air bag and status light

⬙ in this section. Move the child restraint to another

seating position.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

LRS2671

Rear seats

䊊

䊊

Top tether strap

Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Rear bench seat

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to


2. Position the top tether strap seatback.

over the

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point

䊊 on the rear-parcel shelf behind the child restraint.


If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, consult a NISSAN dealer for details.

WARNING



BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.


1-37

A.

B.

Low back booster seat

High back booster seat

LRS2479 LRS0453

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS0464

● Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a high back booster seat should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

1-38


All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety,” “Child restraint” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

WRS0699

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0454

Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit.

If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the

booster seat is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to



1-39

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt with retractor” in this section.

LRS0865

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:

● Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioners (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

1-40


Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags on both sides are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, instructions, and precautions on seat belt usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

WRS0031

● The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.


1-41

● The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

● The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

1-42


ARS1133

ARS1041

WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations

ARS1042

WARNING

● Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1043


1-43

ARS1044

1-44


ARS1045 WRS0256

WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

SSS0188

WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

SSS0101

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:

● The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.


1-45

WRS0032

WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

1-46


SSS0159 SSS0162

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators

LRS2702

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules

4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

5. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

6. Crash zone sensor

7. Occupant classification system control unit

8. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

9. Seat belt buckle switches for driver’s and front passenger’s side

10. Seat belt with pretensioners (front seats)

11. Side satellite sensors

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items.

● Do not allow a passenger in the rear

bench seats to push or pull on the seatback pocket.

● Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lb (1kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.

● Do not store luggage behind the seat

that can press into the seatback.


1-47

● Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear bench seats.

If the front seat does contact the rear bench seats, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.

● If a forward-facing child restraint is in-

stalled in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat as occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section for information about installing and using child restraints.

● Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status light.

● If you notice that the front passenger air

bag status light is not operating as described in this section, please take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer to check the occupant classification system.

● Until you have confirmed with your

dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the

information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.

1-48


The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor and the

Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored.

Based upon information from the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag system, please contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.


LRS0865

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air bag status light which is located on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

⬙ON⬙ position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:

● Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:

The light is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Front passenger seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The light illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied front passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions as outlined in this section: The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational.


1-49

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.

signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

For additional information related to the normal operation and troubleshooting of this occupant classification sensor system, please refer to

“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-

1-50


ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. For additional information about proper use and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being

used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the meter and gauges area of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

● Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

● Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.

● Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

● Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

● Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats” section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat belts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.


1-51

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor system locks the classification during driving so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. Also, the occupant classification sensor system may recalculate the weight of the occupant when the vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.

● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

● An object placed under the front passenger seat.

● An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

Troubleshooting

NOTE:

If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat:

A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.

This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle should be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:

● A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.

● Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag is suppressed.

● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

1-52


However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

● Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.





● An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.


NOTE:


If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

● Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.

● The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.

● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.





● An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.


NOTE:


If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.

● Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.


1-53

● Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

● Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of the air bag and result in serious personal injury.

● Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).


made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

● Work on and around the front air bag

system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer.

The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

LRS0259

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails in both rows. All

of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed.

The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on

1-54


the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe off-roading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in all rows. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants.

Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.


made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems.


1-55

● Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioners (front seats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-

ter activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioners are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by a NISSAN dealer.


made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensioner

system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer.

Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.

● If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioners or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioners help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioners are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When pretensioners activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioners’ activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

1-56


The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional information, refer to

⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙ in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

LRS2699

1.

SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it!

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.


1-57

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.

Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a

NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioners must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a

NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pretensioners cannot be repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

● If there is an impact to your vehicle from

any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked by a NISSAN dealer to verify it is still functioning correctly. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.

1-58


MEMO


1-59

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Checking LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . 2-15

Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Drive computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Vehicle information display warnings and indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Control Panel and vehicle information display

Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Navigation System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Navigation Swipe to Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Rain-sensing auto wiper system

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Daytime running light system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Climate control seat switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Power moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Dual Panel Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Power moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Rear power sunshade (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

HomeLink® universal transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Operating the HomeLink® universal transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button. . . . . . 2-64

If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2


LIC3260

1.

Vent (P. 4-24)

2.

Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-38)

3.

Supplemental front-impact air bag/horn

(P. 1-40, 2-42)

4.

Meters, gauges, warning lights, indicator lights and vehicle information display (P. 2-3, P. 2-7, P. 2-15)

5.


6.

Vent (P. 4-24)

7.

Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

8.

Navigation controls*

9.

Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 2-34)

10.

Vent (P. 4-24)

11.

Glove box (P. 2-47)

12.


(P. 1-40)

13.

USB-AUX port (P. 2-46)

14.

Heater and air conditioning controls

(P. 4-25)

15.

Shift lever (P. 5-22)

16.

Display Commander*

17.

Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)

18.

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System/Audio control switches

(P. 4-29)

METERS AND GAUGES

19.

Cruise control main/Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) (if so equipped) set switches (P. 5-40, 5-42)

20.

Hood release (P. 3-20)

21.

Fuse box (P. 8-22)

22.

Heated steering wheel switch


Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-45)

Trunk release switch (P. 3-21)

Rear power sunshade switch


23.

Instrument brightness control

(P. 2-38)/Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-3)

* Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.


1.

Tachometer

2.

Warning lights and indicator lights

3.

Vehicle information display/Odometer/

Twin trip odometer

4.

Speedometer

LIC3191

5.

Fuel gauge

6.

Engine coolant temperature gauge


2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.

2-4


LIC3116

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer

䊊 are displayed below the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

LIC3179

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET

䊊 switch on the instrument panel to change the display as follows:

Trip

Trip

→ Trip → Odometer Mileage →

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

䊊 for more than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

LIC3114

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into the red zone

䊊

.

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

LIC3189

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range

䊊 when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for immediate action required.


2-5

LIC2222

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light is located in the lower right corner of the vehicle information display next to the Distance to Empty. When the white, the fuel status is normal.

to orange in conditions of low fuel.

is will change

2-6


Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips. the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light or Brake warning light



Forward emergency braking system warning light

(if so equipped)


Master warning light







Side light and headlight indicator light (green)



Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

High beam indicator light (blue)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

CHECKING LED

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on:

, , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go off:

, , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.


2-7

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information, refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

2-8


WARNING

● Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator

When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the ABS warning light illuminates, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked and, if necessary, repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driving and abrupt braking. For additional information, refer to “Antilock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.


If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately.

CAUTION

● Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.


This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Forward Emergency Braking

(FEB) system warning light (if so equipped)

This light illuminates when the Forward Emergency Braking system is set to OFF on the meter display.

If the light illuminates when the Forward Emergency Braking system is ON, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.


Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning also appears in the vehicle information display.

When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately one minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after the one minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The “Tire Pressure Low Add

Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.


2-9

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

● If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked by a


● If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death.

Check the tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it wit ha spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Since the spare tire is not equipped with

TPMS, when mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● TPMS is not a substitute for the regular

tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

The master warning light illuminates whenever there is an active warning that can be reviewed in the “warnings review” content page in the meter, or if there is a red-level warning being displayed

(which cannot be dismissed). The master warning light will illuminate red if a red-level warning is being displayed, or yellow otherwise.

● Push Engine Start Lock Warning

● Key Fob Removed from Vehicle Warning

● Incorrect Key (RED)

● Door/Trunk Open (vehicle stationary)

● Trunk Open (vehicle moving)

● Door Open (RED with vehicle moving)

2-10


● Parking Brake ON (RED)

● Low Washer Fluid

● I-Key System Fault

● Low Tire Pressure

● CVT Warning

● Sonar Parking Sensor Error

● LED Headlight Failure (RED if no other red warnings are active)

● Chassis Control warning

● Driver Attention Alert System Fault

● Emergency Assist Pedal System Fault

For additional information, refer to “vehicle information display” in this section.


WARNING

● If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

● When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be much harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates that the power steering system is operational. If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing.

Have the power steering system checked by a

NISSAN dealer. For additional information, refer to “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.


The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.


When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.


2-11

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the seat belts with pretensioner system may not function properly. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental restraint system (SRS)” in the

“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a


INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.


The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are ON. For additional information, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.


The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, refer to “Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

2-12


Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

● MIL on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

● MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.


This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC (if so equipped) position.

The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security systems” in this section.

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlights are ON

(not including daytime running or signature lights). If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the side light and headlight indicator light will illuminate when the headlights turn on. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.


This indicator will blink when the VDC system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after the

VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position.

The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.


The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.


2-13

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the VDC system is not operating.

Push the VDC off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The VDC light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the indicator light while you are driving, have the VDC system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

While the VDC system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key left reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

OFF position with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off or to AUTO

(if so equipped) before leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® Lock-in

Prevention

The Intelligent Key buzzer sounds if the Intelligent

Key is left inside the vehicle when the doors are closed and locked. When the buzzer sounds, be sure to take the Intelligent key with you when leaving the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Predriving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to zero.

2-14


VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

LIC3224

The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

● Home

● Audio Information

● Navigation Information

● Drive Computer Information

● Fuel Economy Information

● Driving Aids Information (if so equipped)

● Tire Pressure Information

● Sport Information (Oil pressure, Gear Oil

Temperature, Digital Speedometer, Horsepower)

● Indicators and Warnings

● Vehicle and Meter Display Settings

● Cruise Control Status

● Odometer/twin trip odometer

● Gear Position Indicator (P, R, N, D)

● Distance To Empty and Fuel Indicator

LIC3177

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be changed using the on the steering wheel.

and buttons located

SOURCE - Pressing SOURCE with the ignition ON will display a list of available audio sources in the vehicle information display.

The audio sources can then be selected with the , and OK buttons on the steering switch for direct access.

OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle information display.


2-15

— Scroll up or down the vehicle information menu items. If the vehicle information display is not showing a menu with the buttons, pressing or will change to the previous/next audio preset.

— go back or forward through the vehicle information menu items or to change from one display screen to the next.

The OK, and buttons also control audio and control panel functions in some conditions. Most screens and menus offer instruction prompts of the steering switch buttons to indicate how to control the vehicle information display. An orange cursor is shown to indicate where you are in the available menu items. A scroll bar with up and down arrows will appear if there is more than one page of menu items. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC position the screens that display in the vehicle information display include:

● Home

● Audio

2-16


● Navigation

● Drive Computer

● Fuel economy

● Driving Aids (if so equipped)

● Tire Pressures

● SPORT

● Warning Review

● Settings

The warnings review title section will show how many active warnings exist, or 0 in the event that no warnings are active. For additional information, refer to “vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in this section.

To control what items display in the vehicle information display, refer to “Main menu selection” in this section.

LIC3261

DRIVE COMPUTER

The Drive Computer displays driving and average trip information, and can be accessed from the startup display on the vehicle information display.

Select the Drive Computer icon, and press the

OK button. To reset the driving and average trip information, use the or button to select which item to reset, or select Reset All.

Select YES, and press the OK button to reset information history.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display as well as the model for several vehicle functions:

● Driver Assistance

● Customize Display

● Vehicle Settings

● Maintenance

● Clock

● TPMS Settings

● Unit/Language

● Key-Linked Settings

● Factory Reset

Driver Assistance

To change the status, warnings or turn on or off any of the systems/warnings displayed in the

“Driver Assistance” menu:

Use the button to select and the OK button to change a menu item:

● Blind Spot (if so equipped) ON/OFF

● Parking Aids

● Emergency Brake (if so equipped)

● Driver Attention Alert (if so equipped)

ON/OFF

● Timer Alert

● Low Temperature Alert ON/OFF

● Integrated Dynamics-control Module - Active Trace Control ON/OFF (if so equipped)

● Integrated Dynamics-control Module - Active Engine Brake ON/OFF (if so equipped)

● Integrated Dynamics-control Module - Active Ride Control ON/OFF (if so equipped)

Customize Display

The Customize Display allows the customer to choose from various meter selections.

The meter settings can be changed using the and the OK button.

Main Menu Selection

The items that display can be enabled/disabled when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. To change the items that display.

Use the button to select and the OK button to change a menu item:

● Home

● Audio

● Navigation

● Drive computer

● Fuel Economy

● Driving Aids (if so equipped)

● Tire Pressure

● SPORT

Car Icon Color

The color of the vehicle that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed. The vehicle icon shown in some warnings and screens will change to the color selected.

ECO Info Settings

The following information can be enabled/disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

From the “Customize Display” select “ECO Info

Settings” to display the information when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

● ECO Drive Report – Select ON or OFF to display the information when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the fuel economy is improved from the recorded best, the opportunity to update that value is possible during that time.


2-17

● View History - Select to display the vehicle’s recorded fuel economy information history.

To reset the information, press the OK button and confirm the reset by pressing the OK button again when prompted.

Navigation Settings

This setting allows the customer to configure the navigation options in the vehicle information display as well as the navigation display mode in the meter.

1. Use the

Setting”.

buttons to select “Navigation

2. Press the OK button to turn ON/OFF the

Navigation alert that appears in the meter.

3. Press the OK button to change the “View

Mode” between “City” and “Arrow” which changes how the road intersection is displayed when a route is set.

Welcome Effect

The welcome screen display can be adjusted when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

ON position. Press the button to toggle through the menu options. Press the OK button to turn on/off the following:

● Gauges - Enables/disables the needle movement at startup.

2-18


● Animation - Enables/disables the vehicle video at startup.

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings allows the customer to change settings for interior lights, turn signals, intelligent key settings, unlock settings and other vehicle settings.

The vehicle settings can be changed using the , , and the OK buttons.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu option to adjust the following:

● Auto Room Lamp

● Accent Lighting

● Light Sensitivity - The light sensitivity can be set to illuminate earlier based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Press OK to change the sensitivity timing.

● Light Off Delay - The duration of the automatic headlights can be changed from 0 to

180 seconds. Press OK to change the duration.

Turn Indicator

The 3 flash pass can be set to be ON or OFF.

From the Turn Indicator menu, select “3 Flash

On”. Use the OK button to turn this feature ON or

OFF.

Locking

Select the “Locking” menu option to turn on/off the following locking indicators:

● Ext. Door Switch — When this item is turned on, the request switches are activated for door locking and unlocking. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Ext. Door

Switch”. Use the OK button to toggle between ON and OFF. When “ON” is highlighted, Ext. Door Switch is turned on.

● Selective Unlock — When this item is turned on and when the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. The remaining doors will be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Locking” then “Selective Unlock”. Use the OK button to toggle between on and off. When “ON” is highlighted, “Selective Unlock” is turned on. When “ON” is greyed-out, this item is turned off.

● Answer Back Horn (if so equipped) — When the answer back horn is on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.

Wipers

● Rain Sensor (if so equipped) - The rain sensor feature can be set to ON or OFF. From the Wipers menu, select “Wipers” then

“Rain Sensor”. Use the OK button to turn this feature ON or OFF.

● Speed Dependent (if so equipped) - The speed dependent feature can be set to ON or OFF. From the Wipers menu, select “Wipers” then “Speed Dependent” Use the OK button to turn this feature ON or OFF.

Driving Position (if so equipped)

The driving position has two features that can be set to be ON or OFF. From the Driving position menu, select “Exit Seat Slide” or “Exit Steering

Up”. Use the OK button to turn this feature ON or

OFF.

Remote engine start

The remote engine start feature can be set to be

ON or OFF. From the Remote engine start menu, use the OK button to turn this feature ON or OFF.

Maintenance

The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts for the reminding of maintenance intervals based on vehicle mileage.

1. Push the button to toggle through the menu items, and select “Settings” and press

OK.

2. Select “Maintenance” using the ton and press OK.

but-

Oil and Filter

You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing these items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.”

Tire

You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.


2-19

Other

Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.

Clock

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation Owner’s Manual.

TPMS Settings

The unit for tire pressure that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed to:

● psi

● kPa

● bar

● kgf/cm

2

Use the buttons and the OK button to select and change the unit.

Unit/Language

Select “Unit/Language” to adjust vehicle units and language on the vehicle information display.

The vehicle information display language can also be changed by operating the navigation unit

(if so equipped). For additional information, refer

2-20


to the separate Navigation Owner’s Manual. Use the buttons to choose from the following menu options:

● Mileage/Fuel

● Tire Pressure Unit

● Temperature

● Language

Mileage/Fuel

The unit for the mileage that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed to:

● miles, MPG

● km, km/l

● km, l/100km


Tire Pressures

The unit for tire pressure that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed to:

● psi

● kPa

● bar

● kgf/cm

2


Temperature

The temperature that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed from:

● °F (Fahrenheit)

● °C (Celsius)

Use the OK button to toggle choices.

Language

The language of the vehicle information display can be changed to:

● English

● Français

● Español

Use the buttons and the OK button to select and change the language of the vehicle information display.

Key-Linked Settings

The Key-Linked Setting can be turned ON/OFF using the OK button. It will display the key synchronized and in use for this vehicle.

The linked items include:

● Enabled Main Content Screens

● Car Icon Color

● Welcome Effects

● Units

● Language (Meter only)

● Navigation Style (Arrow/City)

● I-Key Link System On/Off

● Content Screen from Previous Ignition ON

● Illumination Level

● Memory seat/ pedal position (if so equipped)

Settings will be memorized automatically as they are changed, if the Key-Linked system is enabled for the currently recognized key. The vehicle settings and Navigation settings are not included in the Key-Linked system. In the event that two linked keys are in the vehicle and the undesired key is detected, turn ignition to OFF, press the door lock or unlock button on the desired key, and restart the vehicle.

Factory Reset

The settings in the vehicle information display can be reset back to the factory default. To reset the vehicle information display:

1. Use the buttons to select “Settings”, and press the OK button.

2. Select “Factory Reset” using the tons and press the OK button.

but-

3. Select “YES” to confirm the reset and set all settings back to default by pressing the OK button.


2-21

2-22


LIC3244

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. Engine start operation

2. No Key Detected

3. Shift to Park

4. Key Battery Low

5. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

6. Key ID Incorrect

7. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual

8. Release Parking Brake

9. Low Fuel

10. Low Washer Fluid

11. Door/Trunk Open

12. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

13. Loose Fuel Cap

14. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual

15. Tire Pressure Low – Add Air

16. Sensor

17. Park Sensor

18. Driver Attention Alert Malfunction (if so equipped)

19. Alarm - Time for a break? (if so equipped)

20. Driver Attention Alert - Take a Break? (if so equipped)

21. Illumination Brightness Control

22. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse (if so equipped)

23. Power will turn off to save the battery

24. Power turned off to save the battery

25. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

26. Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

27. Oil and Filter

28. Tire

29. Other

30. Cruise indicators

31. Transmission Shift Position Indicator

32. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

33. BSW/RCTA system malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)

34. FEB/PFCW system malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)

35. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system ON indicator (if so equipped)

36. SPORT

37. Outside Temperature Display

38. Low Outside Temperature Alert

Engine start operation

This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift lever


2-23

is not in P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine.

Key Battery Low

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

This indicator appears when the battery of the

Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent

2-24


Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key.


Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual

This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-

serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Door/Trunk Open

This warning illuminates when a door has been opened.

I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for a period of time and then turns off.

The I-Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible.

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, refer to

“Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual

This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Sensor

This warning illuminates when the sensor is activated. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Park Sensor

This indicator illuminates when the sensor is activated. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Driver Attention Alert Malfunction (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Driver Attention

Alert system is not functioning properly. For additional information, refer to “Driver Attention

Alert (if so equipped)” in the Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Alarm - Time for a break? (if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the driver enables the Timer Alert function within the Driving Aids

Settings and the selected set time is expired. The time is based on ignition on time and can be set up to six hours.

Driver Attention Alert - Take a Break? (if so equipped)

This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.

Illumination Brightness Control

This indicator shows the illumination adjustment of the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to “Instrument Brightness Control” in this section.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse (if so equipped)

This warning may appear if the extended storage fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on). When this warning appears, push in (switch on) the extended storage fuse switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, refer to “Extended storage switch” in this section.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, refer to

“Push-button ignition switch positions” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Power turned off to save the battery

This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned to off. For additional information, refer to “Push-button ignition switch positions” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.


2-25

Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.

Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears if the Integrated Dynamicscontrol module detects an error in the Active

Trace Control, Active Engine Brake, or the Active

Ride Control systems. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, refer to “Integrated Dynamic-control Module, Active Trace Control, Active Engine Brake, or the

Active Ride Control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Oil and Filter

This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for changing the engine oil and filter. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing these items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, see a “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.”

Tire

This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Other

This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing

2-26


maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.

Cruise indicators

This indicator shows the cruise control system status.

When cruise control is activated, will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle information display will also display the speed the cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed. If cruise control is on and cancelled, the speed will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle will return to if the resume button his activated.

Transmission Shift Position Indicator

This indicator shows the transmission shift position.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning illuminates when the there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

BSW/RCTA System Malfunction: See

Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Blind Spot

Warning/Rear Cross Traffic Alert systems are not functioning properly. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning system” and “Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

FEB/PFCW System Malfunction: See

Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Forward Emergency Braking/Predictive Forward Collision warning systems are not functioning properly. For additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)” and “Predictive Forward

Collision Warning (PFCW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system ON indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by the color. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) System” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

SPORT

This indicator illuminates when Sport mode is activated. The indictor will show on the vehicle information display for 6 seconds.

Outside Temperature Display

The outside temperature display appears in the center region of he vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Temperature” in this section.

Low Outside Temperature Alert

This indicator appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). For additional information, refer to “Temperature” in this section.

CONTROL PANEL AND VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

INTERACTION

Some of the information and operations available on the control panel can also be viewed and operated on the vehicle information display. The vehicle information display operations can be conducted with the switches on the steering wheel.

AUDIO

Use or and select hicle information display main menu.

on the ve-

The vehicle information display shows the status for the audio source currently in use.

Some examples of what will be displayed:

● Source

● Artist

● Song

● Album

Pushing the source button will display a list of available sources to select with the steering switch controls if they ignition is on, or cycle through the available audio sources in accessory mode.


2-27

RECEIVING A CALL

Using Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, a received phone call can be operated on the vehicle information display as well as on the touchscreen display.

1. When there is an incoming call, the caller information and the operation keys are displayed on the vehicle information display.

2. Use or to highlight the preferred item and push the OK button to select the item.

[Answer]

[Decline]

Available keys Action

Answers the received phone call.

Declines the received phone call.

INFO:

A cellular phone device must be connected and selected among other connected Bluetooth® devices before hands-free operation. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation Owner’s

Manual.

2-28


TEXT MESSAGING

Using Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, a received text message can be operated on the vehicle information display as well as on the touch-screen display.

To read/ignore an incoming text

1. When a new text message is received, a pop-up window and operation keys will appear with the sender’s name or phone number on the vehicle information display.

2. Use or to highlight the preferred item and push OK to select the item.

[Read]

[Ignore]


View or hear the received message.

Ignore the received message.


2-29

To reply to/exit from a text

1. When a new text message is received and

[Read] is selected, operation keys are displayed on the vehicle information display.

2. Use or to highlight the preferred item and push the OK button to select the item.

[Reply]

[Exit]


Available pre-determined messages will be displayed on the vehicle information display if the steering switch controls are used. Further operations, such as voice recognition reply operation, is available when using the touch-screen display.

Ends text message operation and the vehicle information display will show the previous screen.

INFO

A cellular phone device must be connected and selected from among other connected Bluetooth® devices before hands-free operation. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation

Owner’s Manual.

2-30


NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Turn-by-turn route guidance can be displayed on the vehicle information display.

To view turn-by-turn route guidance on the vehicle information display, use scroll to menu.

or and on the vehicle information display

LIC3228

City view

City view shows representation of intersections with road curvature and surroundings.

Lane guidance will appear in the lower right corner if the data is available for that street. The next turn and the distance to the next turn are displayed on the vehicle information display. A countdown bar is shown in the arrow. The bar gets smaller as you get closet to the next turn.

LIC3163

Arrow view

Lane guidance will appear in the lower right corner, if the data is available for that street.

A turn direction arrow with an icon indicating your current route location is displayed. A countdown bar will be shown on the left side of the vehicle information display. The bar gets smaller as you get closer to the next turn.


2-31

LIC3229

Compass view

Compass view is displayed when no route is set, and shows current weather conditions and speed limit information (if available).

LIC3230

Far screen view

Far screen view shows destination information, weather and speed limit information (if available for the street).

Navigation settings

The navigation related display settings can be changed.

1. Select using or push the OK button A menu will display.

and

2. Using or , select [Customize

Display] and then select [Navigation Settings].

3. Select the preferred item using or .

2-32


[Alerts]

[Arrow view]

[City view]

Available items Action

When this item is turned on, the view of the turning point with an alarm sound will interrupt the displays other than navigation screen when the vehicle approaches the guide point.

When this mode is selected, the Arrow view will be displayed on the vehicle information display.

When this mode is selected, the view on the vehicle information display will switch from the Arrow view to the City view as the vehicle approaches a guide point.

4. Push the OK button to turn on or off the [Alerts] setting or to toggle the view mode between

[Arrow] or [City].

LIC3234

NAVIGATION SWIPE TO METER

Turn-by-turn route guidance can also be viewed in the vehicle information display by using Navigation Swipe to Meter. This can be done by programming a route, touching the turn-by-turn route icon on the center display, and swiping towards the general direction of the vehicle information display.

The turn-by-turn route icon will move across the center display and transfer the route information to the vehicle information display when the vehicle is not moving.


2-33

SECURITY SYSTEMS

The icon will not move across the screen if the vehicle is moving over speeds of 7 kph (4 mph), yet the information will still transfer to the vehicle information display.

The turn-by-turn route guidance cannot be transferred to the vehicle information display if the navigation screen is already shown or if a warning is present.



LIC2930

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors, trunk, liftgate or the hood when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and trunk/liftgate.

Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch (if so equipped), or mechanical key.

2-34


4. Confirm that the security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed.

The vehicle security system will automatically shift into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every three seconds. If during the pre-armed phase one of the following occurs, the system will not arm:

● Any door is unlocked with the mechanical key, the intelligent key or door request switch (if so equipped).

● Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON position.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all the doors, hood and trunk lid locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently but synchronously.

● The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening any door or hood without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock knob).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door or the trunk/liftgate with the mechanical key, pressing the button on the Intelligent Key, or pressing the request switch on the driver’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.


2-35

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

LIC0474


The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.

2-36


WIC2748

Type A (if so equipped)

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

䊊

䊊

Intermittent (INT) or AUTO — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob

䊊

.

Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

LIC3187

Type B (if so equipped)

Push the lever up

䊊 to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you

䊊 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshieldwasher fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

LIC3233

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push the lever down to the AUTO position

䊊

. The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front toward the rear

䊊

(Low).

䊊

(High) or

– High — High sensitive operation

– Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, push up the lever to the OFF position, or pull down the lever to the LO or HI position.

For additional information on disabling the rainsensing feature, refer to “How to Use the Vehicle

Information Display” in “Vehicle Information Display” in this section.

CAUTION

● Do not touch the rain sensor and

around it when the wiper switch is in the

AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause an injury or damage a wiper.

● The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-

tended for use during rain. If the switch is left in the AUTO position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor.


2-37

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

● When the windshield glass is coated

with water repellent, the speed of the rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher even though the amount of the rainfall is small.

● Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto

wiper system when you use a car wash.

● The rain-sensing auto wipers may not

operate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining.

● Using genuine wiper blades is recom-

mended for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. For additional information, refer to “Windshield wiper blades” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

LIC2325

To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirror (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

WIC1435

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

Rotate the switch to the position, and the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on.

Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

2-38


CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC3188

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position

䊊

.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, , or position.


2-39

WHA1170

Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the key in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC3192

Headlight beam select

To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on and the light illuminates.

䊊

䊊

Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will turn off after a period of time.

2-40


CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

The LED portion of the headlights automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position. When you turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination the LED lights switch from daytime running lights to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights remain on while the engine is running.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch

ON for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain OFF while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC3176

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “+” button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “-” button to decrease the brightness of instrument panel lights.

LIC3193

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down until it latches to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.


2-41

HORN

Lane change signal

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

WIC1440

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the tion.

posi-

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

LIC3174

To sound the horn, push near the horn icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

2-42


HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

LIC1543

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as desired. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

● The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is not running.

● Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the seat.

● Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.

● If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.


2-43

CLIMATE CONTROL SEAT SWITCH (if so equipped)

SIC4334

The climate controlled seat warms up or cools down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air from under the surface of the seat. The climate control switch is located on the center console.

The climate controlled seat can be operated as follows:

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob or the cool side

䊊 to the heat side

. The indicator light the control knob will illuminate.

䊊 on

3. Adjust the desired amount of air using the control knob. The climate controlled seat blower remains on low speed for approxi-

2-44


mately 60 seconds after turning the switch on or selecting the desired temperature.

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the control knob to the Off

(center) position. The indicator light

䊊 on the control knob goes off with the switch in the off (center) position.

To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat, contact a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the climate controlled seats if you or the occupants cannot monitor seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in those body parts in contact with the seat.

Use of the climate controlled seats by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

● The battery could run down if the cli-

mate control seat is operated while the engine is not running.

● Do not use the climate control seat for

extended periods or when no one is using the seat.

● Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar objects. This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat.

● Any liquid spilled on the seat should be

removed immediately with a dry cloth

● The climate controlled seat has an air

filter. Do not operate the climate controlled seat without an air filter. This may result in damage to the system.

● When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.

● If any malfunctions are found or the

climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

LIC0421

The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.

LIC1548

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.


2-45

POWER OUTLET EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

WIC1119

Console Box

The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The power outlets are powered only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. See a NISSAN dealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that exceed

a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

● Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

LDI2758

The extended storage switch is used when shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

2-46


STORAGE

LIC3266

MAP POCKETS

LIC3268 LIC3181

SEATBACK POCKETS

The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items:

● Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest.


2-47

LIC0016

● Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.

LIC2312

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help prevent an accident.

2-48


CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

LIC3182

Front cup holders

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Spilled liquid can also damage the seat climate system.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Rear cup holders

LIC2915 LIC3183

Bottle holder — front

CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.


2-49

Bottle holder — rear

LIC3184 LIC3186

Storage Tray

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

LIC2429

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the master key when locking or unlocking the glove box.

There is a trunk cancel switch in the glove box.

For additional information, refer to “Cancel switch” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-50


WINDOWS

WIC1504

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, press in on the lever and raise the lid

䊊

.

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.


the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

● Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.


2-51

LIC3238

Driver’s side power window switch

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side automatic switch

4. Right rear passenger side

5. Left rear passenger side

6. Driver side automatic switch

2-52


The driver’s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached.

Front passenger’s power window switch

LIC2397

The passenger’s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open the window partially, push the switch down lightly until the desired window position is reached. To close the window partially, pull the switch up until the desired window position is reached.

LIC0718

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached

䊊

. To close the window, pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached

䊊

.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver’s side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

LIC0410

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse function

If the control unit detects something caught in an automatic operation window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

The auto-reverse function may be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.


2-53

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

If the windows do not close automatically

If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch for more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other windows.

If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LIC2644

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The power moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, push the switch toward

䊊

.

To fully close the moonroof, push the switch toward

䊊

.

2-54


To open or close the moonroof part way, push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

Close the moonroof by pushing the switch toward

䊊

. Release the switch, then push the switch toward

䊊 again to tilt the moonroof up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch toward

䊊

.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child restraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward.

DUAL PANEL MOONROOF (if so equipped)

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close

Have a NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof.

LIC3175

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The power moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.


2-55

Sliding the moonroof

To slide the moonroof:

● To fully open the moonroof, push the switch

䊊 toward the open position until it reaches the second detent. If the switch

䊊 is pushed to the first detent, only the sunshade will open.

● To fully close the moonroof, push the switch

䊊 toward the close position until it reaches the second detent. If the switch

䊊 is pushed to the first detent, the moonroof will close but the sunshade will remain open.

● To open or close the moonroof part way, release the switch

䊊 or

䊊 while the moonroof is sliding open or closed. The moonroof will stop at the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt the moonroof:

● To tilt the moonroof up, push and release the tilt switch

䊊

. When the moonroof is open, it will automatically close and then tilt up.

● To tilt the moonroof down, push and release the tilt switch

䊊 or push the switch

䊊 toward the close position until it reaches the first detent.

2-56


● To tilt the moonroof down and close the sunshade at the same time, push the switch

䊊 to the close position until it reaches the second detent.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Depending on the environment or

driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child restraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

LIC2644

Sunshade

To open the sunshade:

● To fully open the sunshade, push the switch

䊊 toward the open position until it reaches the first detent.

● To fully open the sunshade and the moonroof together, push the switch

䊊 toward the open position until it reaches the second detent.

To close the sunshade:

● To fully close the sunshade, push the switch

䊊 toward the close position until it reaches the second detent.

● Pushing the switch

䊊 to the first detent will close the moonroof only.

If the moonroof does not close

Have a NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof.

REAR POWER SUNSHADE (if so equipped)

WIC1443

The rear sun shade operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

The rear sun shade switch is located on the front console.

● To raise the sun shade, push the upper side of the switch

䊊

.

● To lower the sun shade, push the lower side of the switch

䊊

.

● The switch need not be held down.


2-57

INTERIOR LIGHTS

LIC3231

CAUTION

● Do not place objects (such as newspa-

pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the screen when it is extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the screen.

● Do not push the sun shade arm with

your hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.

● Do not hang any object on the arm rail

as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen.

● Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing

so may elongate the screen. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.

● To avoid personal injury, keep your

hands, fingers and head away from the sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port.

● Do not allow children near the rear sun

shade system. They could be injured.

● Do not pull or push the rear sun shade.

This could cause improper operation or damage it.

LIC2302

The interior light can be turned ON regardless of door position. The light will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position when any door is opened.

The interior lights can be set to operate when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a is door open, push the switch; the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position.

2-58


The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after a period of time when the doors are open.

NOTE:

The step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position.

These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC2303

CONSOLE LIGHT

The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control in the vehicle information display.

LIC1083

PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.


2-59

LIC2304

MAP LIGHTS

To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To turn them off, push the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

TRUNK LIGHT

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.

When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

For additional information, refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases).

Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” in this section.

2-60


WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

● During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

LIC2365

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com.

NOTE:

It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to

HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radiofrequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 5–14 cm (1–3 inches) away from the

HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light

䊊 in view.


2-61

LIC2365

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and handheld transmitter button. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light

䊊 flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light

䊊 flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in the “Programming HomeLink® for gate openers” section.

2-62


LIC2366

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

● If the indicator light

䊊

is solid/continuous, programming is

complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

● If the indicator light

䊊 blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device.

A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.

Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the

“learn” or “smart” button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink® button for

2 seconds and release.

Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence up to three times to complete the training process.

HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND

GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Training” procedures, replace

“Programming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the frequency signal has been learned.

The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 -

3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If

HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position – keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.


2-63

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer to “Reprogramming a single

HomeLink® button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds.

Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515

(except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:


FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2-64


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Remote Engine Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Remote engine start operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Canceling a remote start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Conditions the remote start will not work . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Interior trunk access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Automatic operation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

KEYS

LPD2346

1.

Intelligent Keys (two sets)

2.

Mechanical keys

3.

Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key System of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires

3-2


erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, a NISSAN dealer can duplicate it.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

● Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

● Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

DOORS

SPA1951

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key, which can be used in case of a discharged battery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation in the same way as an ordinary key.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below.

1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF position.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the trunk passthrough with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to “Trunk lid” in this section, “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Seats” in the “Safety – seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

● Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.






3-3

LPD2129

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as shown.

Manual (for driver’s door only)

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle

䊊

. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle

䊊

.

LPD0461

Driver’s side

Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front locks all doors.

of the vehicle

Turning the key one time toward the rear

䊊 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral

䊊

(where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 60 seconds unlocks all doors

䊊

.

3-4


Opening and closing windows

The driver’s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with automatic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Inside lock

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

LPD2092

To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position

䊊

, then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position

䊊

.

LPD2093

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to the lock position

䊊

. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to the unlock position

䊊

.

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any door open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.


3-5

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

LPD2117

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position

䊊

, the door can be opened from the outside or the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position

䊊

, the door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING



● The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving and transmitting radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves from various distances. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions:

● When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.

● When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a

CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

3-6


In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a yellow indicator illuminates with the message “Warning,

Key ID Incorrect” in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is capable of receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.

For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, see a NISSAN dealer.

LPD2073

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch

䊊

.

NOTE:

If all doors are already unlocked, opening the trunk does NOT require an Intelligent

Key to be in range of the trunk request switch or rear of the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch

䊊

.

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.


3-7

WPD0375

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

3-8


● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD2074


OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch within the range of operation.

LPD2347

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent

Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice, the outside buzzer sounds twice, and the front and tail lights will turn on for 10 seconds.

WPD0369

NOTE:

● Request switches for all doors and

trunk lid can be deactivated when the

“Ext. Door Switch” setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

● Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch

䊊

while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the trunk lid request switch.

● When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.


3-9

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When any door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; a chime will sound and the lock will automatically unlock.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.


side the door pockets.


side or near metallic materials.

3-10


LPD2347

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch.

3. The door on which the request switch was pressed will unlock and the hazard warning lights flash once, the outside buzzer sounds once, and the front and tail lights will turn on for 30 seconds.

4. Push the door handle request switch again within one minute, the outside buzzer sounds once and the remaining doors unlock.

WPD0369

NOTE:

● If Selective Unlock is turned OFF in the

Vehicle Settings, all doors will unlock upon the first request switch

䊊

press.

● Request switches for all doors and

trunk lid can be deactivated when the

“Ext. Door Switch” is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pushing the request switch.

● Opening any door.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

● Locking the doors with the remote control.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

LPD2351

Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch

䊊 for more than 1 second while carrying the Intelligent Key with you. If all doors are already unlocked, opening the trunk does NOT require an Intelligent Key to be in range of the trunk opener request switch or rear of the vehicle.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.


3-11

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

3-12


LPD2257

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the

Key.

button on the Intelligent

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice, the horn beeps once, and the front and tail lights will turn on for 10 seconds.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles.

LPD2258

Unlocking doors

1. Press the

Key.

button on the Intelligent

2. The driver’s door will unlock and the hazard warning lights flash once, and the front and tail lights will turn on for 30 seconds.

3. Press the button again within one minute, the outside buzzer sounds once and the remaining doors unlock.

NOTE:

If Selective Unlock is turned off in the Vehicle Settings, all doors will unlock upon the first press of the Intelligent Key remote. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pressing the button:

● Opening any doors.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation.

● To open the windows, press and hold the button on the Intelligent Key for

longer than 3 seconds.

The door windows will lower while holding down the button on the Intelligent Key.

NOTE:

The windows will stop lowering at the time the button is released.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key.


3-13

WPD0364

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button for longer than 1 second to open the trunk lid. The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the

OFF position. For additional information, refer to

“Cancel switch” in this section.

WPD0361

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 1 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

● It has run for a period of time, or

● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

● The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.

● The trunk open request switch is pressed while the Intelligent key is in range of the trunk request switch area and the doors are locked.

3-14


LPD2259

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is deactivated and the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice.

When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator lights nor the horn operates.

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and light flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the

ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode.

To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the answer back horn feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the and

more.

buttons for at least 2 seconds once

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the

Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.


3-15

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.

When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine

When shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) position

Symptom

The red “Shift to Park” warning appears on the vehicle information display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The Push ignition to OFF warning appears in the display.

When opening the driver’s door to get out of the vehicle

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

When pushing the door handle request switch or the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The door open warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The yellow “No Key Detected” warning appears on the vehicle information display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately three seconds.

The red “Shift to Park” warning appears on the vehicle information display and the inside and outside chimes sound continuously.

The outside chime sounds for approximately three seconds and all the doors unlock.

The outside chime sounds for approximately three seconds.

Possible Cause

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

The Intelligent Key is not detected inside of the vehicle.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

Remedy

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

Place the ignition switch in the ON position or close the driver’s door.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.



3-16


When closing the trunk lid

Symptom

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears on the display.

Possible Cause

The battery charge is low.

The yellow “Key ID Incorrect” warning appears on the vehicle information display.

The outside chime sounds for approximately

10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is not detected inside of the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.

Remedy

Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

Carry the registered Intelligent Key with you.



3-17

REMOTE ENGINE START

LPD2078

The button will be on the NISSAN Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has remote engine start.

This feature allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when the remote start feature is used:

● Vehicles with an automatic climate control system will default to either a heating or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For additional information, refer to “Remote engine start logic” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section in this manual.

3-18


● Vehicle equipped with heated seats may have this feature come on during a remote start, depending on the seat heater position.

For additional information, refer to “Heated seats” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of the

Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to “Conditions the remote start will not work” in this section.

Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®

System” in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The remote engine start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.

The remote engine start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the remote start feature to start the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the doors.

LOCK button to lock all

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the remote start button until the turn signal lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle is not within view press and hold the remote start button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts:

● The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.

● The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.

● The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional ten minutes. For additional information, refer to “Extending engine run time” in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then press the pushbutton ignition switch to the ON position before driving. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows:

● The first 10 minute run time will start when the remote start function is performed.

● The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the remote start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

● Extending engine run time will bring you to the two remote start limit.

● The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

● The ignition switch is pushed without an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

● The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed.

A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the

ON position and then back to the OFF position before the remote start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE START

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START

WILL NOT WORK

The remote start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:

● “Remote Engine Start” is turned off in the

“Locking” section of the Vehicle Settings menu.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

To cancel a remote start, perform one of the following:

● Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and press until the parking lights turn off.

● Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

● Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

● The extended engine run time has expired.

● The first 10 minute timer has expired.

● The engine hood has been opened.

● The shift lever is moved out of park.

● The hood is not securely closed.

● The hazard warning lights are on.

● The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off.

This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

● The remote start button is not pressed and held for at least 2 seconds.


3-19

HOOD

● The remote start button is not pressed and held within 5 seconds of pressing the lock button.

● The brake is pressed.

● The doors are not closed and locked.

● The trunk or back door is open.

● The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid in the vehicle information display.

● The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

● Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote start with an extension, have already been used.

● The vehicle is not in P (Park).

● There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.

Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.

● The Remote Start function has been switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

The remote engine start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

3-20


Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place.

LPD2354

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

TRUNK LID

WARNING

● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.



LPD2080

OPENER OPERATION

To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

NOTE:

You can open the trunk lid with the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in this section.

LPD0186

Cancel switch

When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch or with the Intelligent

Key.


3-21

WIC1401

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.

INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS

The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat.

The rear seat can be locked using the mechanical key to prevent unauthorized access. For additional information, refer to “Keys” in this section.

1. Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position.

2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel shelf.

3. Insert the mechanical key into the access lid lock to unlock (if locked).

4. Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf.

5. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.

3-22


WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.



FUEL-FILLER DOOR

WPD0454

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks when the driver’s door is unlocked.

1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of the following operations.

● Unlock the driver’s door with the Intelligent Key.

● Push the power door lock switch to the unlock position.

● Push the door handle request switch.

2. To open the fuel-filler door, push the right side of the fuel-filler door to release.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and lock the doors.

NOTE:

The fuel-filler door will unlock using the key only when all doors are unlocked. Unlocking the driver’s door will not unlock the fuel-filler door.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.


3-23

CAUTION

● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-

pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears may cause the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips.

If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

LPD0482

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

3-24


STEERING WHEEL

LPD2365

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

WARNING

● Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

● Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort.

The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

LPD2359

MANUAL OPERATION (if so equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever down:

● Adjust the steering wheel up or down in direction

䊊 to the desired position.

● Adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction

Push the lock lever

䊊

䊊 steering wheel in place.

to the desired position.

up firmly to lock the


3-25

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so equipped)

LPD2360

Tilt and telescopic operation

To adjust the steering wheel move the switch in the following directions:

● Adjust the steering wheel up or down in direction

䊊 to the desired tilt position.

● Adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction

䊊 to the desired telescopic position.

CAUTION

For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Failure to reset the tilt and telescoping functions of the steering wheel, after the vehicle’s battery has been discharged, may prevent the steering wheel position from being adjusted.

For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Both the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be reset after the vehicle’s battery has been discharged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic operation from locking in one position. When the battery has been recharged or replaced, perform the following:

● For tilt operation: Adjust the switch

䊊 so the steering wheel moves to the highest position that can be reached.

䊊 so the steering wheel moves to the most forward and backward position be reached.

䊊 that can

Performing these operations resets the range of the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver’s door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. The steering wheel moves back into position when the driver’s door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.

3-26


SUN VISORS

WPD0344

To block glare from the front, swing down the sun visor.

To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side.

Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original position.

● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-

ibly downward.

LPD2312

VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open.


3-27

MIRRORS

LPD0469

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR

The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors

䊊

or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

The indicator light

䊊 will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press the O button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again, press the | button again. The indicator light will turn on.

For additional information, refer to the

“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2352

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch

䊊 to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch

䊊

.

3-28


WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both outside mirror surfaces downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle when the mirror control switch is in either the L or R position.

The mirrors automatically returns to their original position when you shift out of R (Reverse).

The outside mirror surfaces will return to their original position when one of the following has occurred:

● The shift lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).

● The outside mirror control switch is set to the neutral or center position.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in the

Center position, mirror surface will NOT turn downward when the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information regarding this feature, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.

MPA0008

Foldable outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

The electric control type outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Push the rear window defroster switch to activate the heating function. Push the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.


3-29

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system has two features:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

3-30


LPD2348

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering column

(if so equipped), and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position

(The vehicle should be stopped while setting the memory).

2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column (if so equipped), and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety—

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and

“Tilt/Telescopic Steering” and “Outside mirrors” in this section.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound if the memory has been stored.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory position will be overwritten by the new stored position.

Confirming memory storage

Push the SET switch.

● If a memory position has not been stored in the switch (1 or 2) the indicator light for the respective switch will come ON for approximately 0.5 seconds.

● If a memory position has been stored in the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the respective switch will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

Linking an Intelligent Key to the meter display (if so equipped)

Each Intelligent Key, up to a maximum of four, can be linked to the meter display.

1. Make sure to turn ON the “Key-Linked Settings” in the meter to enable the system for desired Intelligent Key.

2. When the system is enabled, the recognized

Intelligent Key is displayed at start up, as well as within “Key-Linked Settings”.

3. When the system is active, the meter setting items are memorized for each Intelligent Key that has been enabled in the system.

4. The auto drive positioner system is memorized automatically when the ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF by the Intelligent

Key with no need to set separate buttons for recalling and memorizing positions.

5. If two Intelligent Keys are in the vehicle, the system will recognize the Intelligent Key that was used most recently, such as to unlock/lock the door.

6. If there is a desire to change to another

Intelligent Key while in the vehicle, the user must turn the ignition OFF and initiate communication from the desired Intelligent Key.

a. Ignition from ON position to the OFF b. Unlock door with the desired Intelligent

Key c. The desired Intelligent Key number should appear on the meter display.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or canceled through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information display by performing the following:

● Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.

● Switch the Exit Steering Up from ON to OFF.

The system contains a ON/OFF setting for when the settings are not to be memorized.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat and automatic operation steering column will automatically move when the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up:

● When the driver’s door is opened and the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

● When the ignition switch is turned from

ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position:

● When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or

ON while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the stored memory positions may be lost and some of the functions will be restricted.

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

OR

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than

2 times with the ignition switch in the OFF position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH

(7 km/h).

● When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.


3-31

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s seat and steering column is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

● When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position.

● When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.

3-32


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

How to turn on and off predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Around View® Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . . . . . 4-15

How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Around View® Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-17

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . 4-20

MOD system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Turning MOD on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22


Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Heater and Air Conditioner (automatic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

NISSAN Voice Recognition System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button

WARNING


structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

4-2


LHA3579

● RearView Monitor is a convenience fea-

ture and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

● The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

● The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position or when the CAMERA button is pressed. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

LHA3581 LHA1196

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just above the vehicle’s license plate

䊊

.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line

䊊 are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate the RearView

Monitor.

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

● Red line

䊊

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

● Yellow line

䊊

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

● Green line

● Green line

䊊


䊊



4-3

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines

Indicate the predicted course when backing up.

The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned.

The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

LHA3614

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

4-4


Backing up on a steep downhill

LHA3616

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA1201

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines

䊊 do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA3588

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position

䊊 is shown farther than the position in the display. However, the position

䊊 actually at the same distance as the position

C

A

is

䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

.

the position

䊊 if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

● If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

● On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.

● If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

● When the steering wheel is turned with

the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.


4-5

LHA1197

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen

䊊 when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

4-6


LHA1198

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines

䊊 enter the parking space

䊊

.

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parking space

䊊

䊊 parallel to the while referring to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

LHA3522

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. While on a RearView Monitor screen, touch the touch-screen display. The Camera Settings screen will come up.

2. Touch the Display Settings key.

3. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”

“Color,” or “Black Level” key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the + or — key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF

PREDICTED COURSE LINES

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position:

1. Touch the Settings key.

2. Touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to turn the feature ON or OFF.

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the R (Reverse) position:

1. Touch the touch-screen display.

2. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to turn the feature ON or OFF.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

● The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show every object.

● Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.

● Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.


4-7

● Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.

● Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

● Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.

● When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:

● When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.

● When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.

● The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.

● There may be a delay when switching between views.

● If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA3581

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.

● Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

䊊

, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

4-8


AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button

LHA3579


4-9

WARNING


structions for the proper use of the

Around View® Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

● The Around View® Monitor is a conve-

nience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.

● The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The Around View® Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.

Available views:

● Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of the front of the vehicle.

● Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of the rear of the vehicle.

● Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle from above.

● Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front passenger’s side wheel.

LHA3587

To display the multiple views, the Around View®

Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one just above the vehicle’s license plate

䊊

.

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

When the camera is first activated with the bird’seye view in the display, a red icon (if so equipped) will flash on the screen. This indicates that the sonar system (if so equipped) is activated. For

4-10


additional information on the front and rear sonar system (if so equipped), refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The screen displayed on the Around View®

Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pressed with the shift lever in a position other than the R (Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

● The distance guide lines and the vehicle

width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

● Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.


sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird’s-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.

● When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.

● Objects in the rear view will appear vi-

sually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.

SAA1840

● Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-

erly judge distances to other objects.

Front view

Front and rear view


there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line.

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with reference to the vehicle body line

䊊 are displayed on the monitor.

● The vehicle width and predicted course

lines are wider than the actual width Distance guide lines: and course.

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

● The displayed lines will appear slightly

off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.

● Red line

䊊

: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

● Yellow line

䊊

: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

● Green line

● Green line

䊊


䊊



4-11

The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight-ahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines

䊊

are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

SAA1896

Rear view

Vehicle width guide lines

䊊

:

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines

䊊

:

Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

4-12


LHA3730

Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.

The vehicle icon

䊊 shows the position of the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover indicated in black.

are

The non-viewable area

䊊 is highlighted in yellow for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is displayed. It will be shown only the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The driver can check the approximate direction and angle of the tire on the display by the tire icon

䊊 when driving the vehicle forward or backward.

WARNING

● Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

● Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.

● Objects that are above the camera can-

not be displayed.

● The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position alters.

● A line on the ground may be misaligned

and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

● Tire angle display does not indicate the

actual tire angle.

LHA2652

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line of the vehicle.

shows the front part

The side-of-vehicle line

䊊 shows the approximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions

䊊 of both the front and side lines are shown with a green dotted line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.


4-13

LHA3614 LHA3616

Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

4-14


LHA1201

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines

䊊 do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA3588

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position

䊊 is shown farther than the position in the display. However, the position

䊊 actually at the same distance as the position

C

䊊 is

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

.

the position

䊊 if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING


sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.


there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.

● If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

● When the steering wheel is turned with

the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

LHA1197

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen

䊊 when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.


4-15

LHA1198

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines

䊊 enter the parking space

䊊

.

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parking space

䊊

䊊 parallel to the while referring to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

The Around View® Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are:

● Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

● Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the available views are:

● Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

● Front view/front-side view split screen

4-16


If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the only available view is front view/front-side view split screen.

The display will switch from the Around View®

Monitor screen when:

● The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

● A different screen is selected.

LHA3590

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Touch the touch-screen display with the

Around View® Monitor on.

2. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”

“Color,” or “Black Level” key.

3. Adjust the item by touching the + or — key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Around View® Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LHA3620

WARNING


Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

● Do not use the Around View® Monitor

with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the trunk is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Around View®

Monitor.

● The apparent distance between objects

viewed on the Around View® Monitor differs from the actual distance.

● The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything on the vehicle that covers the cameras.

● When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.


4-17

● Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be viewed

䊊

. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam

䊊 of the camera viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.

● Objects on the Around View® Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment.

● There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird’s-eye view.

● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:

● There may be a delay when switching between views.

● When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.

● When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.

● The colors of objects on the Around View®

Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

4-18


LHA3591

System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Around

View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras

䊊

, the Around View® Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3592

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer if it occurs frequently.

LHA3587

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION



● Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely affected.


4-19

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

(if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button

4-20


LHA3579

WARNING


structions for proper use of the Moving

Object Detection system could result in serious injury or death.

● The MOD system is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.

● The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

● The MOD system is not designed to

detect surrounding stationary objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:

● When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

● When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed.

LHA3593

Front and bird’s-eye views

The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:

● When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.

● When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view.


4-21

LHA3594

Rear and bird’s-eye views

● When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view.

The MOD system will not operate if the trunk is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view.

LHA3595

Rear and front-side views

When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD system does not chime

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame

䊊 is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.

The yellow frame is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes.

A blue MOD icon

䊊 is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

To turn the MOD system on or off, press and hold the CAMERA button for more than 2 seconds.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING


MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

4-22


● Do not use the MOD system when tow-

ing a trailer. The system may not function properly.

● Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

● The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:

– When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects.

– When there is a blinking source of light.

– When strong light such as another vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is present.

– When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.

● The MOD system might detect flowing

water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.

● The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.

● If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.

● When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.

This is not a malfunction.

LHA3587

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION



● Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras

䊊

, the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.


4-23

VENTS

LHA3577

Side

Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides.

Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move the dial toward the to open the vents or toward the to close them.

Center

LHA3578

Rear (center console)

LHA3599

4-24


HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic)

1.

FRONT (defroster) button

2.

Temperature control dial (driver’s side)/

AUTO button

3.

Display screen

4.

Temperature control dial (passenger’s side)/DUAL button

10. ON-OFF button

11.

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.



● Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

LHA3575

5.

Fresh air intake button

6.

Air recirculation button

7.

A/C (air conditioner) button

8.

MODE (manual air flow control) button

9.

(fan speed control) buttons


4-25

NOTE:

● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.

● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

3. You can individually set driver’s and front passenger’s side temperature using each temperature control dial. When the DUAL button is pressed or passenger’s side temperature dial is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the passenger’s side temperature control, press the DUAL button.

Heating (A/C OFF)

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator on the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.

● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator light comes on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

● Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.

● Not recommended if windows fog up.

4-26


Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the front defroster button on.

The indicator light on the button will come on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the maximum temperature to aid in defrosting or defogging.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed control buttons to set the fan speed to maximum.

● As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

● When the front defroster button is pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. When the air recirculate mode automatically turns off, the air fresh mode will automatically turn on.

Remote engine start logic (if so equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and remote start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when remote start is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. Automatic temperature depends on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the fan speed control buttons to manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the mode.

front defrosting

Fresh air intake

Press the fresh air intake button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment.

Air flow control

Pressing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows mainly from center and side vents.

— Air flows mainly from center and side vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets and partly from defroster.

— Air flows mainly from defroster and foot outlets.

To turn system off

Press the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS

● When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

● Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation.

● If you feel that the air flow mode you have selected and the outlets the air is coming out do not match, select the mode.

● When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the feet vents for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.


4-27

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

LHA3554

The sunload sensor, located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.



ANTENNA

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

4-28


CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular phone should not be used for

any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

● If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control modules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM




4-29

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM



4-30


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge. . . . . . . 5-13

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Remote start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . 5-15

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Drive mode selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Normal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-22

BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . . . . . 5-25

BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30


Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . . . . 5-32

RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . 5-35

RCTA system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36



Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped). . . . . . 5-42

ICC system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

The ICC switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

ICC system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50



Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) (if so equipped) . . 5-56

FEB system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Turning the FEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

FEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59


System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61


Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

PFCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Turning the PFCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

PFCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66


System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71


Driver Attention Alert (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72

Driver Attention Alert system operation. . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

How to enable/disable the Driver Attention

Alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

Driver Attention Alert system limitations . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80

Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Integrated Dynamics-control Module

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Active trace control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Active engine brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Active ride control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Front and Rear Sonar System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-84

System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

Active noise cancellation/Active sound enhancement (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

Active noise cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

Active sound enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

WARNING





EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

5-4


● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

● Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation button to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check all four tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.


5-5

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After all four tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

● The Tire Pressure Low-Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The

Tire Pressure Low-Add Air warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

● The Tire Pressure Low-Add Air warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

5-6


● The Tire Pressure Low-Add Air warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label) is located in the driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING



● If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the

TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:



NOTE:

Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.

Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.


5-7

3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

● If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.

● If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

● The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill

Tire Alert under the following conditions:

– If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS system.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators.

5-8


– The identification code of the tires pressure sensor is not registered to the system.

– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.

● If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.

If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or overthe-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or

“blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide.

The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

If there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure, the vehicle will generally move or pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this situation, losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury.

To help avoid loss of control:

● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

● Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.


5-9

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs too. Don’t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

LSD2014

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate.

If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position, push the ignition switch center:

● once to change to ACC.

● two times to change to ON.

● three times to change to OFF.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

5-10


If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

LSD2089

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.

The operating range of the engine start function is inside of the vehicle

䊊

.

● The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.

● If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.

● If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories, such as the radio, when the engine is not running.


5-11

ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position after a period of time under the following conditions:

● All doors are closed.

● Shift lever is in P (Park).

● Hazard lamps are off.

● Turn signals are off.

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur:

● Any door is opened.

● Shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

● Ignition switch changes position.

● Hazard lamps are turned on.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions:

● All doors are closed.

● Shift lever is in P (Park).

● Hazard lamps are off.

● Turn signals are off.

5-12


The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur:

● Any door is opened.

● Shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.

● Ignition switch changes position.

● Hazard lamps are turned on.

● Turn signals are turned on.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.

If equipped, the ignition switch heart beat function (pulsed illumination) may activate for a period of time when any door is unlocked and when the door opened/closed status changes in the OFF and ACC positions.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

SSD0860


BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

(After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ON.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within ten seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.

NOTE:

● When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.

● If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Battery Replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.


5-13

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints/headrests.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.

● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or

6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push-button ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever to the

P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

5-14


DRIVING THE VEHICLE

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE START

Vehicles started with the remote start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position. To place the ignition switch to the

ON position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Press the ignition switch once to the ON position.


LSD2354

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or (M)

Manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed.

Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. It can also damage the vehicle.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

● Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

● The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.


5-15

The CVT can operate in two different automatic drive modes:

● D (Drive) mode - Move the shift lever to D

(Drive), the transmission is in the normal forward automatic driving mode. The position indicator in the meter shows a “D”.

● Manual shift mode - Move the shift lever over from D (Drive) to the left into the manual shift gate. The position indicator in the meter shows what gear you are in. In the manual shift mode, transmission operation changes to

⬙Sporty” driving shift operation, creating a more aggressive acceleration feeling than the D (Drive) mode and a gear change sensation when the driver accelerates quickly.

● To cancel the manual mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the automatic drive mode.

The CVT can operate in two manual drive modes:

● Manual mode - With the shift lever in the manual shift gate manual mode, manual mode can be selected by moving the shift lever up (+) or down (–) or using the shift paddles (if so equipped) up (+) or down (–).

In manual mode, the transmission will produce noticeable upshifts and downshifts.

The position indicator in the meter shows the gear you are in.

5-16


● Temporary manual shift mode - With the shift lever in the D (Drive) mode and if the shift paddle is moved + (up) or - (down), the transmission will temporarily switch to the manual mode. If the shift paddles are not used after 5 - 10 seconds, the transmission will return to the D (Drive) mode.

● To cancel the manual mode and return to the

D (Drive) mode, press and hold either shift paddle for 3 - 5 seconds.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the

LOCK position.

LSD2358

To move the shift lever:

Press the button while depressing the brake pedal

Press the button to shift

Shift without pressing button

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake

pedal must be depressed to move the shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.


5-17

LSD2359

Manual shift mode

The transmission enters the manual shift mode by moving the shift lever to the left side in the “D” range. You can select the manual shift range either by moving the shift lever up or down, or by pulling the right-side or left-side paddle shifter (if so equipped). To cancel the manual shift mode, return shift lever to the right D (Drive) position.

The transmission returns to automatic driving mode.

When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) to the manual shift gate

䊊 with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected

5-18


LSD0193 manually. Shift ranges can also be selected using the shift paddles (if so equipped) on the steering wheel

䊊 and

䊊

. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter. When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the position indicator displays

1 (first) up to 7 (seventh) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1

⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7

7 (7th)

Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.

M5 (5th) and M6 (6th)

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.

M1 (1st)

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 6 range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up

Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

When shifting down

Move the shift lever to the

⫺ (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)

● Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

● The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the

3rd range, the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

When canceling the manual shift mode

Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.

● When this situation occurs, the CVT

position indicator light will blink and the chime will sound.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.

● CVT operation is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual shift mode is selected. This is not a malfunction. When

CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be selected.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the shift range may upshift in lower rpm than usual. This is not a malfunction.

LSD2360

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pressed.

It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged, For additional information, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Contact a NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.


5-19

To move the shift lever, complete the following procedure:

1. Press the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover.

● If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used.

4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and rotate clockwise.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.

6. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Make sure to take extra care during the removal of the shift lock cap as this part is easily damaged.

5-20


WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the

P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position and manual shift mode

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into lower range, depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the

“Instrument and controls” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch back to the ON position.

The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a

NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.

The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

● Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

● Do not use the shift lever in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

● To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the vehicle and /or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

LSD2176

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.


5-21

DRIVE MODE SELECTOR BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

LSD2361

Drive mode selector switches

Two driving modes can be selected by using the drive mode selector switches, NORMAL and

SPORT.

NOTE:

● When the drive mode select switch selects a mode, the mode may not switch quickly. This is not a malfunction.

● Select the NORMAL mode for normal driving.

NORMAL MODE

NORMAL mode is recommended for normal driving. Push the NORMAL mode button to select this mode.

SPORT MODE

The SPORT mode adjusts the engine, transmission, and steering to enhance performance. Push the SPORT mode button to select this driving mode.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be reduced.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.

● The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

5-22


LSD2362

The BSW system uses radar sensors

䊊 installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

SSD1030

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.


5-23

5-24


LSD2417

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approximately

20 mph (32km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to

“BSW driving situations” in this section.

The BSW system automatically turns on every time the engine is started, as long as it is activated using the settings menu on the vehicle information display.

LSD2412

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and then press OK. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

OK button.

2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button.

NOTE:

● When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.

● The RCTA system (if so equipped) is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the

BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.

● When the BSW system is turned on, the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.


5-25

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

● The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

● The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.

5-26


– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

● The radar sensors’ detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.

● The radar sensors are designed to

ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

● The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow build-up on the vehicle

– Dirt build-up on the vehicle

● Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

● Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

LSD2299

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

Another vehicle approaching from behind

Illustration 1:The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

LSD2300

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

Illustration 2:If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

● The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

● If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.


5-27

LSD2302

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3:The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.

LSD2303

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 4:If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

● When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together

● The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

5-28


● If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. .

LSD2305

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

Entering from the side

Illustration 5:The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

LSD2308

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

Illustration 6:If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

● If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

● The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.


5-29

5-30


LSD2416

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink

䊊 in the vehicle information display.

The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:


Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

LSD2362

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors

䊊 for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. Consult a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR2B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment


5-31

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)


For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310


Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death.

● The RCTA system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

5-32


1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2417


5-33

LSD2216

The RCTA system uses radar sensors

䊊 installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors

䊊 can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

5-34


LSD2362

LSD2412


RCTA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and then press OK. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

OK button.

2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button.

When the RCTA system is turned on, the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

NOTE:

● The RCTA system is integrated into the

BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the

RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.

● When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.


5-35

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

5-36


LSD2173

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

● Always check surroundings and turn to

check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph

(30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

● The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain situations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.

– Illustration e: When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small

● The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow build-up on the vehicle

– Dirt build- up on the vehicle

● Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles

● Excessive noise (e.g. audio system vol-

ume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

LSD2043

Illustration 1

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.


5-37

Illustration 2

LSD2044

5-38


LSD2416

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink

䊊 in the vehicle information display.

The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.



NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:


Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

LSD2362

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors

䊊 for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.



Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.


5-39

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. Consult a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.


For USA

FCC : OAYSRR2B

This device complies with part 15 of the


(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

LSD2414

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. RES+ switch

3. SET– switch

4. ON/OFF cruise switch

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically.

5-40


WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button.

● Tap the brake pedal.

● Push the switch off. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel goes out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES or SET switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET switch.

● Push and hold the RES switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.

● Push and release the RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.

● Push and release the SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

To turn off the cruise control, use one of the following three methods.


5-41

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)


● Push the CANCEL button.

● Tap the brake pedal.

● Push the switch off. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel goes out.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death.

● ICC is not a collision avoidance or warn-

ing technology. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

● Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

● Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

LSD2367

The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

The ICC system uses a radar sensor

䊊 located on the front of the vehicle to detect vehicles traveling ahead.

If the radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390ft (120 m) ahead.

5-42


LSD2420

ICC SYSTEM OPERATION

The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h), based on road conditions.

The vehicle travels at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking power.

This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.


5-43

For additional information, refer to “Approach warning” in this section.

The following items are controlled in the ICC system:

● When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and

144 km/h).

● When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the

ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime.

● When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the ICC system accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the

ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

5-44


LSD2433

THE ICC SWITCH

The system is operated by the

CRUISE switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.

1. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following distance:

● Long

● Middle

● Short

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.

4. SET– switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.

5. CRUISE

switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

LSD2285

The ICC system display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.

1. CRUISE switch indicator:

● ICC system ON indicator (white): Indicates that the CRUISE

ON.

switch is

● ICC system SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

● ICC system warning (orange): Indicates that if there is a malfunction in the

ICC system.


5-45

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.

LSD2409

Operating ICC

To turn on the cruise control: quickly push and release the CRUISE switch

䊊

. The

ICC system ON indicator (white), set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on in a standby state for setting.

LSD2370

To set cruising speed: accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET– switch and release it. The ICC system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator

䊊 will come on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately

2 seconds:

● When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not detected

5-46


● When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

Manual mode

● When the parking brake is applied

● When the brakes are operated by the driver

When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up:

● When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the

CRUISE switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the CRUISE switch again.)

For additional information about the VDC sytem, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in this section.

● When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) is operating

● When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping. Push the CRUISE switch to turn off the ICC system, and reset the ICC system by pushing the

CRUISE switch again.)

LSD2288

䊊

䊊

System set display with vehicle ahead

System set display without vehicle ahead

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the

ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.

NOTE:

● The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC system.

● When the brake operates, a noise may

be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the

ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled.


5-47

LSD2289

When passing another vehicle, the set speed indicator

䊊 will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

LSD2288

䊊

䊊

System set display with vehicle ahead

System set display without vehicle ahead

How to change the set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed: use one of the following methods:

● Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

● Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

● Turn the CRUISE indicators will go out.

switch off. The ICC

To reset at a faster cruising speed: use one of the following methods:

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET– switch.

● Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately

8 mph (5 km/h for Canada).

● Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h for

Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed: use one of the following methods:

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET– switch and release it.

● Push and hold the SET– switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 8 mph (5 km/h for Canada).

● Push, then quickly release the SET– switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).

To resume the preset speed: push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

5-48


LSD2371

How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.

Each time the distance switch

䊊 is pushed, the set distance will change to long, average, short and back to long again, in that sequence.

LSD2429

Distance Approximate distance at

60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1.

Long

2.

Average

200 (60)

150 (45)

3.

Short 90 (30)

● The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

● If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes “long”. (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display.

Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

● The chime sounds.

● The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles.

Some examples are:

● When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.

● When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

● The vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.

● The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.


5-49

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the

ICC sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when entering or exiting a curve.

In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the radar sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

● The ICC system is primarily intended for

use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the

ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.

SSD0252

● The ICC system will not adapt automati-

cally to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic.

Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

5-50


● As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

● If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

● Always pay attention to the operation of

the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance.

The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.

● The system may not detect the vehicle

in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill roads

– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration

– Interference by other radar sources.

● Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.

● In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:

● Stationary and slow moving vehicles

● Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

● Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

● Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:

● When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

● When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of your vehicle.


5-51

The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation within the limitations of the system.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited.

A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

SSD0253

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

5-52


LSD2373

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set:

● When the VDC system is turned off

● When the VDC or ABS (including the TCS) operates

● When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of

15 mph (24 km/h)

● When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill

● When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

Manual mode

● When the parking brake is applied

● When a wheel slips


5-53

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC

CRUISE switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.

Condition B

When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be cancelled. If the sensor area is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect vehicles ahead. In these instances, the

ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor area.

The system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “front radar obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD2411

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, park the vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off.

Check to see if the radar sensor window is blocked. If the radar sensor window is blocked, remove the blocking material. Restart the engine.

If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the ICC system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the system warning light (orange) will come on.

LSD2395

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

5-54


LSD2367

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the ICC system the front of the vehicle.

is located on

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

● Always keep the sensor area clean.

● Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor. Doing so could cause a failure or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

● Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

● Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause failure or malfunction.

● Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, please contact a NISSAN dealer.


FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.


5-55

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING

(FEB) (if so equipped)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the FEB system could result in serious injury or death.

● The FEB system is a supplemental aid

to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.

● The FEB system does not function in all

driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.

The FEB system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

LSD2367

The FEB system uses a radar sensor

䊊 located behind the lower grille of the front bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

5-56


LSD2424

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. FEB system warning light

FEB SYSTEM OPERATION

The FEB system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph

(5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the FEB system will provide an initial warning to the driver by both a visual and audible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the FEB system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the FEB system issues the second visual warning (red) and audible warning and also applies partial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the

FEB system applies harder braking automatically.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the forward emergency braking system.


5-57

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the FEB system will function later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:

● When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to avoid a collision.

● When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

● When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.

If the FEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately

2 seconds before the brakes are released.

5-58


LSD2412

TURNING THE FEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the FEB systems ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and then press OK button. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

OK button.

2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the

OK button.

3. Select “System” and press the OK button.

When the FEB system is turned off, the FEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

● The FEB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

● The PFCW system (if so equipped) is integrated into the FEB system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the PFCW system. When the

FEB is turned off, the PFCW system is also turned off.

FEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the FEB system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

● The FEB system cannot detect all ve-


● The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Crossing vehicles.

● The radar sensor has some perfor-

mance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicles’s path, the FEB system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

● The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following conditions:

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.


– Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.

– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.

motorcycle).

– When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

● In some road or traffic conditions, the

FEB system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.

● Braking distances increase on slippery

surfaces.

● The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstructions of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to worn the driver properly.

Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.

● Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.


5-59

5-60


LSD2377

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB system is automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

FEB system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB system is automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “front radar obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the

P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the FEB system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

NOTE:

If the FEB system stops working, the PFCW system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the FEB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the FEB warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the FEB systems checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

LSD2367

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor

䊊 is located behind the lower grille of the front bumper.

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

● Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper clean.

● Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.

● Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

● Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

● Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FCC Notice

For USA



1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning



5-61

PREDICTIVE FORWARD COLLISION

WARNING (PFCW) (if so equipped)

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,


ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the PFCW system could result in serious injury or death.

● The PFCW system can help warn the

driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The PFCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD2367

The PFCW system uses a radar sensor

䊊 located behind the lower grille of the front bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

5-62


1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. FEB system warning light

LSD2424


5-63

PFCW SYSTEM OPERATION

The PFCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the

PFCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

5-64


LSD2263

LSD2412

TURNING THE PFCW SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the PFCW system ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and then press OK button. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

OK button.

2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the

OK button.

3. Select “System” and press the OK button.

When the PFCW system is turned off, the FEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

● The PFCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

● The PFCW system (if so equipped) is integrated into the FEB system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the PFCW system. When the

FEB is turned off, the PFCW system is also turned off.


5-65

Illustration A

PFCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD2312

5-66


WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the PFCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

● The PFCW system cannot detect all ve-


● The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway

Illustration B

– Oncoming vehicles

– Crossing vehicles

● (Illustration A) The PFCW system does

not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.

● The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following conditions:

– Snow or heavy rain

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.


LSD2265

– Snow or road spray from travelling vehicles.

– Driving in a tunnel

– (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.

– (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.

– (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.


5-67

● The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.

● Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

5-68


Illustration C

LSD2266

Illustration D

LSD2313


5-69

5-70


LSD2377

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the PFCW system is automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

PFCW system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the PFCW system is automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “front radar obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the

P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the PFCW system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

NOTE:

If the FEB system stops working, the PFCW system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the PFCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the

FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the PFCW system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LSD2367

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor

䊊 is located behind the lower grille of the front bumper.

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

● Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper clean.

● Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.

● Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

● Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

● Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FCC Notice

For USA



1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and


ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning



5-71

DRIVER ATTENTION ALERT (if so equipped)

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,


ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Driver Attention

Alert system could result in serious injury or death.

● The Driver Attention Alert system is only

a warning to inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.

● The Driver Attention Alert system does

not detect and provide an alert of the driver’s lack of attention or fatigue in every situation.

● It is the driver’s responsibility to:

● stay alert,

● drive safely,

● keep the vehicle in the traveling lane,

● be in control of the vehicle at all

times,

● avoid driving when tired,

● avoid distractions (texting, etc).

The Driver Attention Alert system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue.

The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.

5-72


LSD2379

DRIVER ATTENTION ALERT SYSTEM

OPERATION

If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h).

The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip.

The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from on to off and back on.

LSD2412


5-73



Perform the following steps to enable or disable the Driver Attention Alert system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display and press the OK button. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

OK button.

2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and press the

OK button.

NOTE:

The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.


LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the Driver Attention Alert system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

● The Driver Attention Alert system may

not operate properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions:

– Poor road conditions such as an uneven road surface or pot holes.

– Strong side wind.

– If you have adopted a sporty driving style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration.

– Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed.

● The Driver Attention Alert system will

not provide an alert in the following conditions:

– Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph

(60 km/h).

– Short lapses of attention.

– Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object.

LIC3125

System malfunction

If the Driver Attention Alert system malfunctions, the system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

5-74


BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi

(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving

Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

● Avoid rapid starts and stops.

● Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible.

● Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

● Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops.

● Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.

● Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

● Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load.

● Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.

● Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

● Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.

● Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.

● Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.

● Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

● Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.

● Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.


5-75

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

● Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling

● Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

● Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

● Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy.

● Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.

● Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

● Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible.

● When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

5-76


PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

WSD0050

● Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.



1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB:

䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK position.


5-77

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING


off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

● When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still performed, the power steering may stop and the power steering warning light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop the engine and push the ignition switch to the OFF position. The temperature

5-78


of the power steering system will go down after a period of time and the power assist level will return to normal after starting the engine. The power steering warning light will go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the power steering system to overheat.

You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle when the steering wheel is operated. This is a normal operational noise and is not a malfunction.

If the electric power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.


off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a

sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire and loading information label” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.


5-79

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5

- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.

5-80


When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. it is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC System helps to perform the following functions:

● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

● Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indicator in the instrument panel flashes to note the following:

● The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

● Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light comes on in the instrument panel.

The VDC system automatically turns off when the indicator light is on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system. The indicator illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the flash.

indicator will not

The VDC system is automatically reset to ON when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the indicator may flash or the illuminate.

indicator light may

● If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both the and illuminate.

indicator light may

● If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the and the indicator light may illuminate.


5-81

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.

Do not drive on these types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.

This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the the indicator may flash or indicator light may illuminate.

● The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the four wheels depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

● The active trace control and brake force

distribution systems may not be effective depending on the driving condition.

Always drive carefully and attentively.

INTEGRATED DYNAMICS-CONTROL

MODULE (if so equipped)

The Integrated Dynamics-control Module is an electric control module that includes the following functions:

● Active Trace Control

● Active Engine Brake

● Active Ride Control

ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL

This system senses driving based on the driver’s steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.

The Active Trace Control can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle information display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system, the Active Trace Control is also turned off.

If the Integrated Dynamics-control Module warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the Active Trace Control is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

5-82


WARNING

The active trace control may not be effective depending on the driving condition.

Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the Active Trace Control is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the Active

Trace Control is operating properly.

Even if the Active Trace Control is set to OFF, some functions will remain on to assist the driver

(for example: avoidance scenes).

ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE

The Active Engine Brake function adds subtle deceleration by controlling CVT gear ratio, depending on the cornering condition calculated from driver’s steering input and plural sensors.

This benefit is for easier traceability and less workload of adjusting speed with braking at corners.

The Active Engine Brake also enhances braking feel by adding subtle deceleration with CVT gear ratio control according to driver’s brake pedal operation.

The Active Engine Brake can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle information display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

If the Integrated Dynamics-control Module warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the Active Engine

Brake is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

The Active Engine Brake may not be effective depending on driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the Active Engine Brake is operating, the needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates that the active engine brake is operating properly.

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL

This system senses upper body motion (based on wheel speed information) and controls engine torque and four wheel brake pressure. This will enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement when passing over undulated road surfaces. This system comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system, the Active Ride Control is also turned off.

If the Integrated Dynamics-control Module warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the Active Ride Control is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

When the Active Ride Control is operating, you may hear noise and sense slight deceleration.

This is normal and indicates that the Active Ride

Control is operating properly.


5-83

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM


LSD2427

The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.

When the “DISPLAY” key is ON, the sonar view will automatically appear in the meter.

WARNING

● The sonar (parking sensor) system is a

convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.

● The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.

5-84


● Read and understand the limitations of

the sonar (parking sensor) system as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indicator and the distance guide lines in the front/rear view indicate different distances to the object.

● Inclement

weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

● This function is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

● The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

● The system may not detect the follow-

ing objects: Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.,

Thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc., or wedge-shaped objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

● Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

● Keep the sonar sensors (located on the

bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The system informs with a visual and audible alert of front obstacles when the shift lever is in the D

(Drive) position and both front and rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor RR Sensor

Range Sound Display Sound Display

P x † x †

R

N o x o

† o x x D o o o – Display/Beep when detect

† – Display on camera view o

†

† x – No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above

6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle get away from the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increase. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

LSD2428

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indicator

䊊 appears.

LSD2137

The system indicators

䊊 will appear when the vehicle moves closer to an object.


5-85

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry function on the Intelligent Key.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, refer to “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

5-86


● Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.


5-87

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION/

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT (if so equipped)

LSD2450

Front Microphone

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION

This system uses three microphones

䊊 located inside the vehicle to detect engine booming noises. The system then automatically generates a noise cancelling sound through the speakers and woofer to reduce engine booming noise.

NOTE:

To operate the active noise cancellation system properly:

● Do not cover the speakers or woofer.

● Do not cover the microphones.

5-88


LSD2384

Rear Microphones

● Do not change or modify speakers including the woofer and any audio related components such as the amplifier.

● Do not make any modification including sound deadening or modifications around the microphones, speakers, or woofer.

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT

Active sound enhancement enhances existing engine sounds according to the engine speed and driving modes through the speakers and woofer.

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

6-2


FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the “Tire

Pressure Low-Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING



● If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.







● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

● If the light still comes on while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.


6-3

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the CVT is shifted into P

(Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142

A.

Blocks

B.

Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2224

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the trunk. Remove the floor carpeting and spare tire cover.

6-4


Remove the tool box from the spare tire.

LCE2225

Remove the spare tire.

WCE0188 LCE2226

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.


6-5

● Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

● Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

LCE0020

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire.

6-6


WCE0056

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated (

䊊

, tight.

䊊

,

䊊

,

䊊

,

䊊

) until they are

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated (

䊊

䊊

,

䊊

). Lower the vehicle completely.

,

䊊

,

䊊

,

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver’s door opening.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. Refer to specific instruction under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.


6-7

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-

ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.

● Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

● The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

6-8


WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

LCE2223

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence illustrated (

䊊

,

䊊

,

䊊

,

䊊

).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive

(

⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to

4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.


6-9

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION

● CVT models cannot be push-started or

tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

● Do not push start this vehicle. The 3-way

catalyst may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading) or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to

P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

6-10


TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to

“Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.


6-11

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

LCE2227

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

6-12


LCE2228

CAUTION

● Never tow CVT models with the front

wheels on the ground or 4 wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

● When towing with the front wheels on

towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device.

– Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.

● When towing CVT models with the rear

wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.

● When towing CVT models with the front

wheels on the ground, dollies must be used or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

There are two options to recover a stuck vehicle: pulling and rocking. For additional information regarding these options, please refer to the following sections.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:

● Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.

● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow

or free a stuck vehicle.

● Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

● Always pull the recovery device straight

out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.

● Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

NOTE:

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or vehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.


6-13

MEMO

6-14


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain

● after driving on coastal roads

● when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

7-2


CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

WAI0007

GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

䊊

䊊

Push toward rear of vehicle.

Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.


7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

7-4


CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

For Alcantara (if so equipped)

Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup, ketchup, chocolate, ice cream and mustard

Stain

Blood, eggs, excrement or urine

Vinegar, tomato sauce, coffee or hair gel

Water Soluble Stains

Cleaning Method

Use a white towel damped in lukewarm water; rinse by dabbing with a damped white towel in clean water.

Stains Not Soluble in Water

Stain

Makeup (Lipstick, foundation, mascara, eye shadow), perfume, shoe polish, grease or oil (in general), grass stain

Cleaning Method

Rub with ethyl alcohol

(remember not to rub too hard), wipe with water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.

Repeat as Necessary

Repeat treatments as often as necessary. Even stains that are not soluble in water will often require to be treated with water afterwards.

Resistant Stains

Don’t Know What Caused the Stain?

Treat with lukewarm water first, then rinse by dabbing with clean water. If the stain begins to dissolve in the water, repeat the treatment as often as necessary. Allow to dry and if necessary, treat with ethyl alcohol

Wipe with water at room temperature, rinse with clean water. AVOID the use of warm water because it will make these substances coagulate.

Pre-treat with lemon juice, then wipe with lukewarm water, rinse by dabbing with clean water.

Chewing gum

Put a plastic bag full of ice on top of the gum, when the gum has become hard remove the pieces, then treat with ethyl alcohol.


7-5

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:

● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front position.

● Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats

specifically designed for use in your vehicle model. For additional information, see a NISSAN dealer.

● Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning aid.

For additional information, refer to

ⴖFloor mat positioning aidⴖ in this

section.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

LAI0009

Floor mat positioning aid

This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to act as a floor mat positioning aid. Genuine

NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s side floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in them. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned.

7-6


CORROSION PROTECTION

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety –

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

● the accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas

● damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.


7-7

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.

7-8


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . 8-13

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Front park/turn signal/side marker light . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Fog lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money.

However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

8-2


Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with “ * ” is found in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Additional information on the following items with an “*” is found in this section.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the lock knobs

(if so equipped) hold securely in all adjustable positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.


8-3

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:




Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

8-4


system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

additional information, refer to the “Appearance and care” section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P

(Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

● If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuel

filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.


8-5

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or the transmis-

sion related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, refer to “Owner’s

Manual/Service Manual order information” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

8-6


ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

VQ35DE engine

1.

Engine coolant reservoir

2.

Drive belt location

3.

Engine oil filler cap

4.

Brake fluid reservoir

5.

Air cleaner

6.

Fuse block

7.

Fuse block/Fusible links

8.

Fusible links

9.

Battery

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Radiator cap

12. Power steering fluid reservoir

13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2749


8-7

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

● Never use any cooling system additives

such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.

● When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34°

F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or

7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”.

8-8


CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

LDI2750

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level

䊊

䊊

, add coolant to the MAX level

. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level

䊊

.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.

For additional information, refer to the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.


8-9

ENGINE OIL

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

LDI2751

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

WDI0214

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks

䊊

. This is the normal operating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark

䊊

, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill

䊊

.

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

8-10


CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI2763

CHANGING ENGINE OIL


2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap counterclockwise.

by turning it

4. Remove clips tector.

LDI2558 from the under-engine pro-

LDI2634

5. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

䊊

.

6. Remove the drain plug

䊊 with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

If the engine oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in this section.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

● Check your local regulations.


8-11

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

8. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drain and refill capacity, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the


8-12


The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.

9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

LDI2764

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER


2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter

䊊

.

4. Remove pins

䊊 from the right engine protector located inside the right wheel well and then remove protector. Remove oil filter

䊊 with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag.

CAUTION

● Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage.

● The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

CAUTION

● NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 ONLY in

NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.

● Do not use Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

● Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required, we recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.


8-13

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID

LDI2752

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked when the fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86ºF (0 to

30ºC). The fluid level can be checked with the level gauge which is attached to the cap. To check the fluid level, remove the cap. The fluid level should be between the MAX

䊊 and MIN lines.

If the fluid is below the MIN

䊊 line, add Genuine

NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

WARNING

Power steering fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Use of a power steering fluid other than

Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent will prevent the power steering system from operating properly.

LDI2753

For additional information on brake fluid specification, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.

8-14


WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake fluid is below the MIN line

䊊

, the brake warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX line

䊊

. For additional information on recommended type of brake fluid, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities

⬙ in the “

Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

LDI2754

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshieldwasher fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshieldwasher reservoir.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.


8-15

BATTERY

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:




WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames, an

electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

8-16


Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case.

WDI0529

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.


8-17

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM

LDI2755

CAUTION

● Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor

䊊 is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

DRIVE BELT

LDI2131

VQ35DE engine

1.

Crankshaft pulley

2.

Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley

3.

Generator pulley

4.

Air conditioner compressor pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt.

The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

8-18


SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped

䊊 spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.


8-19

AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

LDI2756

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

● Unlatch the clips

䊊 cleaner cover upward.

and move the air

● Remove the air cleaner filter.

● Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the “NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide” for change intervals.

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

8-20


LDI2757

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release tab

䊊

.

3. Move the wiper blade down and remove.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

5. Push wiper on to windshield.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

LDI2731

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle

䊊

. This may cause clogging or improper windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin

䊊

.


8-21

BRAKES FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.

8-22


Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

LDI2385

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

LDI2636

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are in the OFF position.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open fuse

䊊

.

LDI0456

䊊

, replace it with a new

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.


8-23

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

LDI2758

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are in the OFF position.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

8-24


3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

LDI2759

䊊

.

4. If the fuse is open equivalent good fuse

䊊

.

LDI2760

䊊

, replace it with an

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.


Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver the slit

䊊 into of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001


8-25

LDI2637

8-26


3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with and

䊊

.

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:



Note:


For Canada:


LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

(if so equipped)

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.

They can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

If headlight bulb replacement is required, see a

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

● Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.

● Only touch the base when handling the

bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.

● High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

● Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if so equipped)

If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL/SIDE

MARKER LIGHT

If park, turn signal or side marker light bulb replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS

Replacing the fog light bulb

If fog light bulb replacement is required, see a

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

● Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the chart.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light

for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.


8-27

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

High

Low

Daytime running/Park

Turn signal

Side marker

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

High

Low

Daytime running/Park

Turn

Side marker

Front fog light*

Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)*

High-mounted stop light*

License plate light*

Rear combination light *

Stop

Turn signal

Tail

Side marker

Backup (reversing)*

Map light*

Glove box light*

Vanity mirror light

Footwell light

Step light

Personal light*

Trunk light

Wattage (W)

65

55

—

28/8

5

65

—

—

28/8

5

19

—

—

5

1.4

1.8

3.4

3.8

—

3.4

21

21

—

—

16

—

Bulb No.

H9

H11

—

7444NA

W5W

H9

—

—

7444NA

W5W

H16

—

—

W5W

W21W

W21W

—

—

W16W

—

T74

—

158

194

—

158

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

8-28


LDI2762

1.

Map light

2.

Personal light

3.

Step light

4.

Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)

5.

Headlight assembly

6.

Fog light

7.

High-mounted stop light

8.

License plate light

9.

Backup (reversing)

10. Rear combination light

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

WDI0263

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.


8-29

Use a cloth

䊊

Vanity mirror light

to protect the housing.

LDI2096

Use a cloth

Step light

to protect the housing.

LDI0341

Trunk light

LDI2135

8-30


WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure

Low - Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the

⬙Cold Tire Pressure⬙ heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, refer to “TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.


8-31

If the tires are used at speeds above

100 MPH (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race track for example), the cold tire inflation pressure must be increased. For additional information, refer to “Checking tire pressure” in this section.

Set the tire pressure to the normal cold tire inflation pressure when the vehicle speed or load is reduced.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so equipped). Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident.

Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

● Increase the cold tire inflation

pressure as indicated in

ⴖCheck-

ing tire pressure

ⴖ in this section

when using the tires specified by

NISSAN above 100 MPH

(162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race track for example).

Failure to increase the cold tire inflation pressure may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. After such use, readjust tire pressure.

● For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

8-32


Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in this section.

Spare tire size.

Tire and loading information label

Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

Vehicle load limit: Refer to the loading information in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

LDI2000

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.


8-33

LDI0393

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

8-34


4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

Size

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

245/45R18

245/40R19

245/40WR19

Spare Tire:

(Temporary)

T145/80D17

Full Size Spare

Tire

245/40R19

Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

33 PSI, 230 kPa

60 PSI, 420 kPa

33 PSI, 230 kPa

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

WDI0395

Example

Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of height to width.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.


8-35

LDI2786

Example

䊊

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identification mark.

Tire ply composition and material

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

8-36


The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure.

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

● Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.


specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.

● For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

● Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the VDC system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and differential gears.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.


8-37

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Do not use tire chains/cables on this vehicle. Doing so will cause damage to the vehicle.

WDI0258

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

8-38


Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.






WDI0259

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer.






Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the


WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, VDC system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height.

Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equipped

with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.


8-39

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the

VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. For additional information on wheel-off set dimensions, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.







● Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

● The use of retread tires is not

recommended.


tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.


tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

8-40


Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-

gency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels).

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.


8-41

MEMO

8-42


9 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 9-2

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

When traveling or registering in another country. . . . . . 9-11

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-21

Event Data Recorders (EDR) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 9-21

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-22

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Fuel

Engine oil

VQ35DE

Cooling system

With oil filter change

Without oil filter change

With reservoir

US measure

Capacity (Approximate)

Imp measure

18 gal 15 gal

5-1/8 qt

4-3/4 qt

2-3/8 gal

Drain and refill

4-1/4 qt

4 qt

2 gal

Liter

68 L

4.8 L

4.5 L

9.2 L

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in this section of the manual.

• For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

• Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark

• Viscosity SAE 0W-20

• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE

5W-30 conventions petroleum oils may be used and meet all specifications and requirements necessary to maintain the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• For additional information, refer to “Changing engine oil” and “Changing engine oil filter” in the


• For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section of the manual.

• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

9-2


Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

Power steering fluid (PSF)

Brake fluid reservoir

Multi-purpose grease

Air conditioning system refrigerant

US measure


Imp measure

—

—

1/8 gal

—

—

—

—

1/8 gal

—

—

Liter

—

—

0.43 L

—

—


• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN

CVT Fluid NS-3 ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.

• Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly.

• Refill to the proper level according to the instruction is the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

• See a NISSAN dealer for service.

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake

Fluid or equivalent DOT 3

• Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.

• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section of the manual.


9-3

Air conditioning system oil

Windshield-washer fluid

US measure


Imp measure

— —

1-1/8 gal 7/8 gal

Liter

—

4.2 L


• Genuine NISSAN A/C System oil ND-OIL8 or equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section of the manual.

• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

9-4


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.


vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

● U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.


9-5

● If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).

It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square,

9-6


Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

LTI2051

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.


9-7

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C system oil ND-OIL8 or the exact equivalents.

9-8


CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has trained technicians and the equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model

Type

Cylinder arrangement

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Firing order

Idle speed

CVT in N (Neutral) position

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug

Spark plug gap (Nominal)

Camshaft operation

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

VQ35DE

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) cu in (cm

3

) 213.45 (3,498)

1–2–3–4–5–6

No adjustment is necessary.

FXE22HR11 in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Timing chain


9-9

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

Aluminum

Aluminum

Size

18 x 8.5J

19 x 8.5J

Spare wheel- steel 17 x 4T

Spare wheel- aluminium 19 x8.5J

Tires

245/45R18

245/40R19

245/40WR19

Spare tires

T145/80D17

245/40/R19

Offset in (mm)

1.97 (50)

1.97 (50)

1.18 (30)

1.97 (50)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front Track

18 inch tire

19 inch tire

Rear Track

18 inch tire

19 inch tire

Wheelbase

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross axle weight rating

Front

Rear in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)

192.8 (4,897)

73.2 (1,860)

56.5 (1,436)

62.4 (1,585)

62.4 (1,585) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)

62.4 (1,585)

62.4 (1,585)

109.3 (2,775) lb (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.

lb (kg) lb (kg)

M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar between the driver’s side front and rear doors.

9-10


WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

WTI0171

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

LTI0070

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.


9-11

LTI2133

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

WTI0172

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

WTI0188

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

9-12


INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

WTI0174

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information Label. The label is located as shown.

WTI0178

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI2123

Use the following steps to mount the front license plate:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the location mark (small dimple) using a 5 mm

(0.20 in) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.

Install the license plate holder using the two screws provided with the holder.

2. Mount license plate

14mm bolts.

using two M6-

License plate bolt tightening torque:

5.74 N·m (4.0 ft-lb)


9-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

9-14


● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the



● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

● Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.


9-15

Example

9-16


WTI0169

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to the Tire and Loading Information label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the



● Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

● Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury.

Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.


9-17

TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

● Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle

with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.

● DO NOT tow any continuously variable

transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

9-18


Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5


9-19

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

9-20


You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng

(English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers)

Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information

Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) (if so equipped)

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the

“ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain collision or near collision-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically

30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which collisions and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial collision situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and collision location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a collision investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.


9-21

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine

NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factorytrained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest

NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the

NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

9-22


10 Index

A

Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-11

Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-57, 2-11

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Air conditioner

Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-13

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . .9-2, 9-8

Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2, 9-8

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25

Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-26

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-34

Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86

Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-79

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Around View® Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . .3-30, 3-31, 3-31

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-53

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-28

Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-30, 3-31, 3-31

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78

Brake warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-14, 8-22

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-75

Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86, 8-16

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Battery replacement

Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . .8-25

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-79

Brake assist (for Intelligent cruise control system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-28

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-14

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

Check tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Child restraints . . . . . . .1-18, 1-19, 1-21, 1-23

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-37

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-25

Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Climate control seat switch . . . . . . . . . .2-44

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-15

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-19

Controls

Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-26

Coolant

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

D

Daytime Running Light System . . . . . . . . .2-40

Defogger Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-41

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Drive Mode Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Drive positioner, Automatic . . . .3-30, 3-31, 3-31

Drive Sport Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Driving

Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86

10-2



Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-4

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . . . .8-2

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76

Emergency engine shutoff. . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-12

Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-19

Engine

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-14

Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87


Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-7


Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2, 9-7

Engine oil pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-8

Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . .2-5

Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-4

F

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14



Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-15

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Folding rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) . . . . . . .2-9

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-47

Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . .5-84

Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Fuel


Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76

Fuel-filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-2, 9-5

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) System

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-60, 2-63, 2-63, 2-64

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Gauge


Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

H

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-38

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43, 2-45

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

Heater

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25

Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-26

Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . .4-25

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-60, 2-63, 2-63, 2-64

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-11

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 8-17

I

Ignition Switch

Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . .5-10

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35, 5-13

Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-12

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76

Indicator

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-12

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-28

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-41

Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system

Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-25

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-11

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-6

L

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-13

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-12

Emission control information label . . . . .9-12

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-12

Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . .9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-11

10-3

Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-57

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-13

Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-11

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-28

Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . .2-7

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-38

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . .2-9

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-49

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-60

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-12

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60

Lock

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

10-4

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-21

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-24

Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-9

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-24

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-14

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . .2-35, 5-13

NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . . .4-30

M

Maintenance

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60

Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30, 3-31, 3-31

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-41

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-28

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54, 2-54

Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . . . .4-20

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-6

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Oil


Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2, 9-7

Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Owner’s manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

P

Parking

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-77

Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53


Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-78

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Precautions

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-37

Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-37

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-11

Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40


Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

Radio

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

Rain sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . .5-32

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

Rear sun shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57

RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .9-2, 9-8

Registering a vehicle in another country . . . .9-11

Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 5-15

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-20

S

Safety

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Child seat belts . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-33, 1-37

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-20

Seat adjustment

Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Seat belt

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-11

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11, 7-7

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-17

Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-14

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-14, 2-11

Seats

Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Automatic drive positioner. . .3-30, 3-31, 3-31

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43, 2-45

Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

Seats/floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . .2-35, 5-13

Security systems

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-17

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-60

SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57

Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80

Starting

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-14

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 8-17


Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Steering

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-45


10-5

Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-78

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-57, 2-11

Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-47

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-57

Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-40

Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-53

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-38

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-41

Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Temperature gauge


Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35, 5-13

Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-41

Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-13

Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31

Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38

Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-18

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31

Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-5

Towing

Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . .2-60, 2-63, 2-63, 2-64

Transmission




Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Trunk access through the rear seat . . . .1-5, 3-22

Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-18

Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-10

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-45

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-80

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . .5-80

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . .9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-11

Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . .2-35, 5-13

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-14

Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), engine start . . . .2-35, 5-13

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30

10-6

W

Warning

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-11

Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . .2-7

Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . . .2-8

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Engine oil pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-8

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-24


Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-49

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-14, 2-11

Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-11

TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-12

Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-57

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-12

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-12

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-12

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-12

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-12

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-10

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31

Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-53

Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Wiper

Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

10-7

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least

87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.


vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

● U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

● Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent

● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 0W-20

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and loading information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the


RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE

BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:

During the first 1,200 mi (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to

“Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : August 2015 (02)

Publication No.: OM16EA 0A36U1

Printed in U.S.A.

A35-D